JP2020081147A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To enhance interest in a game by improving performance regarding a period for controlling to a special state.SOLUTION: A prior suggestive performance is executable in a special state (for example, a second KT state) having high frequency of control to a particular state (for example, a small win game state), and a count suggestive performance (for example, a small win count suggestive performance) is executable based on execution of the prior suggestive performance. Prior suggestive performances (for example, small win prior suggestive performances A to C) are executable in plural kinds of execution modes. Specific display corresponding to the number of times of being controlled to a particular state suggested in the count suggestive performance is displayable. When the number of times of being controlled to a particular state suggested by specific display is small, the count suggestive performance is executable at a higher ratio than when the number of times of being controlled to a particular state suggested by specific display is large.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 9-43

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine capable of playing a game.

As a game machine, a game ball, which is a game medium, is launched into a game area by a launching device, and when a game ball wins a prize area such as a winning opening provided in the game area, a predetermined number of prize balls are paid out to the player. There is something to be done. Furthermore, a variable display device capable of variably displaying identification information (also referred to as “fluctuation”) is provided, and when the display result of the variable display of the identification information is the specific display result on the variable display device, the gaming state (game Therefore, there is a machine configured so as to give a predetermined game value to a player by changing the state of the machine (specifically, the state in which the game machine is controlled) (so-called pachinko machine).

The game value means that the state of the variable winning ball device provided in the game area of the gaming machine is an advantageous state for a player who easily hits a ball, or an advantageous state for a player. That is, the right is generated and the condition for paying out the prize balls is easily established.

In the pachinko game machine, as a display result of the variable display of the special symbol (identification information), which is started on the variable display device based on the fact that the game ball has won the starting winning opening, a predetermined specific display mode is derived and displayed. When it is done, "big hit" occurs. The derivation display is to finally stop and display the symbol (final stop symbol). When a big hit occurs, for example, the big winning opening is opened a predetermined number of times, and a big hit game state where a hit ball is easy to win is entered. Then, in each opening period, when a predetermined number (for example, 10) of winning holes are won, the winning holes are closed. The number of times the special winning opening is opened is fixed to a predetermined number (for example, 15 rounds). An opening time (for example, 29 seconds) is determined for each opening, and even if the number of winnings does not reach a predetermined number, the special winning opening is closed when the opening time elapses. Hereinafter, the opening period of each special winning opening may be referred to as a round. Also, a game in a round may be called a round game.

Further, in the variable display device, the symbols other than the symbol that is the final stop symbol (for example, the middle symbol in the left-middle-right symbol) continue for a predetermined period of time, and stop and shake in a state in which they match the specific display result. It is possible that a big hit occurs before the final result is displayed, because it is moving, scaling or deforming, or multiple symbols fluctuate in sync with the same symbol, or the positions of the display symbols are swapped. The effect performed in a state in which the sex continues (hereinafter, these states are referred to as reach states) is referred to as reach production. Further, the reach state and the state thereof are referred to as the reach mode. Furthermore, the variable display that includes the reach effect is called the reach variable display. Then, when the display result of the symbols variably displayed on the variable display device is not the specific display result, the result is “out”, and the variable display state ends. A player plays a game while enjoying how to generate a big hit.

Some of these gaming machines can be controlled to a special state different from the advantageous state, and can be controlled to a special state in which the special state is controlled more frequently than the non-special state. For example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2004-242242 describes an open mode in which a player can obtain a payout even in a small hitting game state, although it is less than in the big hitting game state. Further, it is described that the control is performed such that a small hit is more likely to occur than in the normal state.

Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2015-156952 (paragraphs 0035 and 0039)

However, in the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1, there is room for improvement regarding the effect regarding the period controlled in the special state.

Therefore, it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine that improves the effect regarding the period of being controlled to a special state and enhances the interest in the game.

(Means 1) The gaming machine according to the present invention is a gaming machine that can perform variable display and can be controlled in an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player (for example, a jackpot gaming state), and information relating to the variable display can be stored as pending storage. Special holding control means (for example, the first holding storage buffer, the second holding storage buffer) and special state control means (for example, for game control) that can be controlled to a special state different from the advantageous state (for example, a small hit game state) A part of the microcomputer 100 that executes steps S126 to S128 and a special state (for example, a high probability) that is controlled to be a special state more frequently than a non-special state (for example, a low probability/low base state (normal state)). / Special state control means (for example, the part that executes steps 076IWS2205 and S2206 in the game control microcomputer 100) that can be controlled to the low base state (second KT state), and that the special state is controlled in the special state Advance suggestion effect that suggests in advance that there is a pending memory corresponding to (for example, the small hit advance suggestion effect shown in FIG. 9-55(F), FIG. 9-56(F) and FIG. 9-57(F)) Pre-indication effect execution means capable of executing (for example, a portion of the CPU 120 for effect control to select a process table corresponding to the small hit pre-indication effect in step 076IWS930 and execute steps 076IWS932 and S8105. A part that executes step 076IWS8116. ), and the number suggestion production that suggests the number of times the special state is controlled based on the execution of the pre-indication production (for example, FIG. 9-55 (G), FIG. 9-56 (G) and FIG. 9-). 57(G) is a number of times suggesting effect executing means capable of executing the small hit number suggesting effect (for example, a portion of the effect control CPU 120 which executes step 076IWS8125) and a special state suggested in the number suggesting effect. A specific display unit (for example, a portion of the CPU 120 for effect control that executes step 076IWS8126) capable of displaying a specific display (for example, a gauge display 076IW021) corresponding to the number of times the specific display unit is controlled. Then, the specific display is changed in response to the control in the special state (for example, the effect control CPU 120 executes step 076IWS9724), and the number suggestion effect execution means sets the execution pattern of the number suggestion effect. , At least the first power indicating that the special state is controlled the first time (for example, twice or three times) Turn (for example, "small win + 2 times! And a small display such as "small hit + 3 times!", and a second pattern (for example, "4 times") that indicates that the special state is controlled a second number of times (for example, 4 times) that is larger than the first number of times. Character display such as "small hit + 4 times!") can be performed, and when the number of times the special state suggested by the specific display is controlled is small, the special state suggested by the specific display It is characterized in that the number suggestion effect can be executed at a higher rate than in the case where the number of times is controlled to be large. According to such a configuration, by performing the notification according to the situation, it is possible to improve the interest in the game and to diversify the effect pattern in the special state, so that the special state is controlled. It is possible to improve the production of the game for a certain period of time and improve the interest in the game.

(Means 2) In the means 1, a specific display means capable of displaying a specific display (for example, gauge display 076IW021) corresponding to the number of times the special state is suggested in the number suggestion production (for example, step in the CPU 120 for production control) 076IWS8126) may be configured. According to such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the effect pattern in the special state, so that it is possible to improve the effect regarding the period controlled in the special state and enhance the interest in the game.

(Means 3) In the means 1 or 2, a specific display means capable of displaying a specific display (for example, gauge display 076IW021) corresponding to the number of times the special state is suggested in the number suggestion production (for example, for production control) The CPU 120 includes a portion for executing step 076IWS8126 in the CPU 120, and when the specific display unit is controlled to the special state, the specific display unit changes the specific display in response to the control to the special state (for example, the effect control CPU 120, If the number of times the special state suggested by the specific display is controlled is low, the number of times suggesting effect execution means is higher than the number of times the special state suggested by the specific display is controlled. It is possible to execute the number of times suggestive effect (for example, when the number of small hits notified by the gauge display 076IW021 becomes 0, the number of small hits suggestion effect is executed, so that the number of small hits suggestion is suggested (notification The smaller the number of small hits, the more frequently the small hit number suggesting effect is executed). According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest in the game by executing the notification according to the situation.

(Means 4) In any one of the means 1 to 3, a specific effect execution means capable of executing a specific effect (for example, the battle effect shown in FIGS. 9-58 (F) and (G)) as the pre-indication effect. (For example, in the effect control CPU 120, a part for selecting a process table corresponding to the battle effect in step 076IWS930 to execute steps 076IWS932, S8105), the specific effect executing means, as an effect result of the specific effect, in an advantageous state. Whether it is controlled or not, it is possible to execute an effect suggesting the number of times (for example, when a battle effect (victory) is executed with a big hit variation, it is notified that it will be a probable variation big hit, and a battle effect (win ) Is executed, the small hit number suggestive effect is executed). According to such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the effect pattern in the special state, so that it is possible to improve the effect regarding the period controlled in the special state and enhance the interest in the game.

(Means 5) In any one of the means 1 to 3, a specific effect execution means capable of executing a specific effect (for example, the battle effect shown in FIGS. 9-58 (F) and (G)) as the preliminary suggestion effect. (For example, in the effect control CPU 120, a part for selecting a process table corresponding to the battle effect in step 076IWS930 to execute steps 076IWS932, S8105), the specific effect executing means, as an effect result of the specific effect, in an advantageous state. Whether or not it is controlled and the number of times suggesting effects can be executed (for example, it is configured to be able to execute both the notification of whether or not the probability variation is a big hit in one battle effect and the number of small hits suggesting effects). You may comprise. According to such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the effect pattern in the special state, so that it is possible to improve the effect regarding the period controlled in the special state and enhance the interest in the game.

(Means 6) In any one of the means 1 to 5, an advantageous state suggestion capable of executing an advantageous state suggestion effect (for example, a button notice effect) indicating the possibility of being controlled to the advantageous state in the non-special state The production|generation execution means (for example, the part which performs step 076IWS8115-S8120 in CPU120 for production|presentation control) is provided, and the advantageous state suggestion production execution means performs execution containing at least 1st element (for example, operation promotion display of a blue display color). The advantageous state suggesting effect (for example, the button advance notice effect A by the aspect and the execution mode including the second element (for example, the operation promotion display of the red display color) that is more likely to be controlled to the advantageous state than the first element) , B) can be executed (see FIGS. 9-40 ), and the pre-indication production execution means is configured to execute the pre-indication production (for example, small hit advance production) by the execution manner including at least the first element and the execution manner including the second element. Suggestive productions B and C) can be executed (see FIG. 9-43), and when the pre-indication production is executed by the execution mode including the second element, the pre-indication production is executed by the execution mode including the first element. In the suggestion of number of times, a higher number is suggested as the number of times the special state is controlled in a higher ratio than in the case of performing the suggestion (for example, as shown in FIG. 9-43, if the small hit advance suggestive effect B is executed. The proportion of the number of small hits is 3 is high, and the proportion of the number of small hits is 4 is high if the small hit preliminary suggestion effect C is executed). According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player's expectation from being betrayed and improve the interest in the game.

(Means 7) Special effect capable of executing a special effect (for example, roulette effect shown in FIG. 9-71) including an effect mode common to the non-special state and the special state in any one of the means 1 to 6 Equipped with execution means (for example, CPU120 for effect control), the special effect execution means, in the non-special state, the effect result suggesting the possibility of being controlled to the advantageous state (for example, shown in FIG. 9-71 (B1). It is possible to execute a special effect including a character display 076IW031) such as "intense heat", and in a special state, a special effect can be executed as a pre-indication effect, and a number-of-times suggestion effect is an effect result (for example, FIG. It is possible to execute a special effect including a character display 076IW032) such as "small 4" shown in FIG. 9) (see FIG. 9-71). According to such a configuration, it is possible to reduce the data capacity by making the production materials common.

It is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine in this embodiment. It is a block diagram showing various control boards and the like mounted on a pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart which shows an example of game control main processing. It is a flowchart showing an example of a timer interrupt process for game control. It is a flowchart showing an example of a first special symbol process processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of character part control process processing. It is the flowchart which shows one example of production control main processing. It is the flowchart which shows one example of production control process treatment. It is an explanatory view for explaining a big hit probability and a small hit probability for every set value. It is an explanatory view for explaining a big hit probability and a small hit probability for every set value. It is an explanatory view showing a jackpot type determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the variation pattern (variation time) of a special design and a decorative design. It is explanatory drawing which shows the variation pattern (variation time) of a special design and a decorative design. It is explanatory drawing which shows the variation pattern (variation time) of a special design and a decorative design. It is an explanatory view for explaining an opening pattern of a variable winning a prize ball device and a special variable winning a prize ball device in a KT state. It is the explanation drawing which shows one example of the contents of production control command. It is the explanation drawing which shows one example of the contents of production control command. It is a flowchart showing a start winning determination process. It is a flowchart showing a first special symbol normal process. It is a flow chart which shows the 1st variation pattern setting processing. It is a flowchart showing a first special symbol variation process. It is a flowchart showing a first special symbol stop process. It is a flowchart showing a second special symbol normal process. It is a flowchart showing a second special symbol variation process. It is a flowchart showing a second special symbol stop process. It is a flow chart which shows accessory control normal processing. It is a flow chart which shows gate passage waiting processing. It is a flowchart showing a big hit ending process. It is a flowchart showing a small hit ending process. It is an explanatory view for explaining how to transition the gaming state. It is a flow chart which shows a concrete example of command analysis processing. It is a flow chart which shows a concrete example of command analysis processing. It is a flow chart which shows a concrete example of command analysis processing. It is a flow chart which shows a concrete example of command analysis processing. It is a flow chart which shows a concrete example of command analysis processing. It is the flowchart which shows the indication production processing when over winning a prize. It is an explanatory view showing a concrete example of an over-winning suggestion effect determination table. It is a flowchart showing a suggestion process at the time of small winning. It is an explanatory view showing a concrete example of a small hit winning suggestive effect determination table. It is a flow chart which shows prize number display suggestion production processing. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of a prize sphere number display suggestion production determination table. It is a flow chart which shows a prize sphere emphasis production processing. It is an explanatory view showing a concrete example of a prize ball number emphasis effect determination table. It is a flow chart which shows variable display start waiting processing. It is a flowchart which shows a variable display start setting process. It is an explanatory view for explaining a concrete example of a setting value suggestive effect determination table. It is an explanatory view for explaining a specific example of a small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect determination table. It is an explanatory view for explaining a concrete example of a button advance notice effect determination table. It is the flowchart which shows the battle production setting processing at the time of big hit. It is the flowchart which shows the small hit announcement production setting processing. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the small hit prior suggestion production determination table. It is a flow chart which shows production processing during variable display. It is a flow chart which shows production processing during variable display. It is a flowchart showing a special figure hit waiting process. It is a flowchart showing a special figure hit waiting process. It is a flow chart which shows ending production processing. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the production mode of setting value suggestive production. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the production mode of small hit RUSH continuation suggestion production. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the display mode of the right-handed notification. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the production mode of the over-winning suggestion production, the small hit winning suggestion production, and the prize ball number display suggesting production. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the production mode of the over-winning suggestion production, the small hit winning suggestion production, and the prize ball number display suggesting production. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the production mode of the small hit prior suggestion production, the small hit number suggestion production, and the battle production executed during the high probability/low base state (second KT state). It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the production mode of the small hit prior suggestion production, the small hit number suggestion production, and the battle production executed during the high probability/low base state (second KT state). It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the production mode of the small hit prior suggestion production, the small hit number suggestion production, and the battle production executed during the high probability/low base state (second KT state). It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the production mode of the small hit prior suggestion production, the small hit number suggestion production, and the battle production executed during the high probability/low base state (second KT state). It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the production mode of the small hit prior suggestion production, the small hit number suggestion production, and the battle production executed during the high probability/low base state (second KT state). It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the production mode of the small hit prior suggestion production, the small hit number suggestion production, and the battle production executed during the high probability/low base state (second KT state). It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the control of the variable display when it is a small hit in the variable display of the other special symbol during execution of the variable display of one special symbol. It is a flow chart which shows the 1st special symbol change processing in the modification 1. It is a flow chart which shows the 2nd special symbol change processing in the modification 1. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the control of the variable display at the time of being a small hit in the variable display of the other special symbol during execution of the variable display of one special symbol in the modification 1. It is a flow chart which shows the 1st special symbol change processing in modification 2. It is a flow chart which shows the 2nd special symbol change processing in modification 2. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the control of the variable display when it is a small hit in the variable display of the other special symbol during execution of the variable display of the one special symbol in the modification 2. It is a flow chart which shows the 2nd special symbol change processing in modification 3. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the control of the variable display at the time of a small hit in the variable display of the other special symbol during execution of the variable display of one special symbol in the modification 3. It is a flow chart which shows the 1st special symbol change processing in modification 4. It is a flow chart which shows the 2nd special symbol change processing in modification 4. It is an explanatory view for explaining the production mode of the roulette production in the modification 5. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a notification mode of the number of small hits in a modified example 6;

(Basic explanation)
First, the basic configuration and control of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (which is also the configuration and control of a general pachinko gaming machine) will be described.

(Structure of pachinko gaming machine 1, etc.)
FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine 1, showing an arrangement layout of main members. The pachinko gaming machine (gaming machine) 1 is roughly divided into a gaming board (gauge board) 2 that constitutes a gaming board surface, and a gaming machine frame (underframe) 3 that supports and fixes the gaming board 2. A game area is formed on the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is shot into the game area by being shot from a predetermined hitting ball launching device.

At a predetermined position of the game board 2 (on the right side of the game area in the example shown in FIG. 1), a variable display (also called a special drawing game) of special symbols (also called a special drawing) as a plurality of types of special identification information is provided. There is provided a first special symbol display device 4A and a second special symbol display device 4B. Each of these consists of a 7-segment LED or the like. The special symbol is represented by a number indicating "0" to "9" or a lighting pattern such as "-". The special pattern may include a pattern in which all the LEDs are turned off.

The “variable display” of the special symbol is, for example, variably displaying a plurality of types of special symbols (the same applies to other symbols described later). The fluctuation includes update display of a plurality of symbols, scroll display of a plurality of symbols, deformation of one or more symbols, enlargement/reduction of one or more symbols, and the like. In the variation of the special symbol or a normal symbol described later, a plurality of types of special symbols or normal symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of the decorative pattern, which will be described later, a plurality of types of decorative patterns are scroll-displayed or updated and one or more decorative patterns are deformed or enlarged/reduced. Note that the variation includes a mode in which a certain symbol is displayed in a blinking manner. At the end of the variable display, a predetermined special symbol is stopped and displayed (also referred to as derived or derived display) as a display result (the same applies to variable display of other symbols described later). The variable display may be referred to as a variable display or a variable.

The special symbols variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A are also referred to as "first special symbols", and the special symbols variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B are also referred to as "second special symbols". In addition, the special figure game using the first special figure is called a "first special figure game", and the special figure game using the second special figure is also called a "second special figure game". The special symbol display device that performs variable display of the special symbol may be one type.

Further, below the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, a right hitting indicator 26 is provided for urging a right hitting operation to perform a firing operation aiming at the right side of the game area. There is. The right-handed indicator 26 is composed of, for example, an LED, and is turned on by the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) mounted on the main board 11 (see FIG. 2).

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display device), an organic EL (Electro Luminescence), or the like, and displays various effect images. The image display device 5 may include a projector and a screen. Various effect images are displayed on the image display device 5.

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, in synchronization with the first special drawing game and the second special drawing game, a decorative pattern as a plurality of types of decorative identification information different from the special pattern (a pattern showing numbers or the like) Variable display is performed. Here, in synchronization with the first special drawing game or the second special drawing game, the decorative pattern is variably displayed (for example, up and down) in each of the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. Direction scroll display and update display). Note that the special figure game and the variable display of the decorative pattern that are executed in synchronization are collectively referred to as simply variable display.

Further, for example, on the screen of the image display device 5, there is provided a display area for displaying a suspension display corresponding to the variable display whose execution is suspended. In this example, the first hold display area 5A for displaying the hold display corresponding to the variable display of the first special figure, and the second hold display for displaying the hold display corresponding to the variable display of the second special figure. Area 5B is provided. A display area for displaying an active display corresponding to the variable display being executed may be provided on the screen of the image display device 5. The hold display and the active display are collectively referred to as a variable display corresponding display corresponding to the variable display.

Further, on the right side of the image display device 5, a right-handing notification LED 37 for urging a right-handing operation is provided. The right-handing notification LED 37 is controlled by the effect control CPU 120 mounted on the effect control board 12 (see FIG. 2).

The number of variable displays that are held is also called the number of held storages. The number of reserved memories corresponding to the first special figure game is also called a first reserved memory number, and the number of reserved memories corresponding to the second special figure game is also called a second reserved memory number. In addition, the total of the first pending storage number and the second pending storage number is also referred to as the total pending storage number.

In addition, at a predetermined position of the game board 2, a first hold indicator 25A and a second hold indicator 25B, which are configured to include a plurality of LEDs, are provided, and the first hold indicator 25A indicates the number of LEDs to be lit. The first pending storage number is displayed by, and the second pending display unit 25B displays the second pending storage number according to the number of lit LEDs.

Below the image display device 5, a winning ball device 6A having a first starting winning port is provided. The game ball that has won the first start winning opening is guided to the back surface of the game board 2 and detected by the first starting opening switch 22A. When a game ball is detected by the first starting opening switch 22A, a predetermined number (1) of game balls are paid out as a prize ball based on this detection information.

A row of nails 19 is provided on the right side of the first start winning opening so that the game balls flowing down from the right side of the game area do not enter the area where the first starting winning opening is provided. Has been done. Thus, the row of nails 19 for preventing the game ball flowing down from the right side of the game area from entering is provided, so that the game ball is operated to aim at the left side of the game area (so-called left hitting). The game ball can be won in the first starting winning opening only when the operation is performed.

In this example, the row of nails 19 is provided, so that the game ball can be won in the first start winning port only when the player makes a left-handed operation. I can't stop. For example, the game ball may be configured to be able to win in the first starting prize hole only when the player is left-handed because the first starting prize hole is provided on the left side of the game area. The mouth may be provided on the left side of the game area, and the row of nails 19 may also be provided so that the game ball can be won in the first start winning opening only when the left striking operation is performed.

A pass gate 41 is provided on the right side of the image display device 5. The game ball that has passed through the passage gate 41 is detected by the gate switch 21.

Below the passage gate 41, a special variable winning ball device 7 forming a special winning opening is provided. The special variable winning ball device 7 extends in the left-right direction in a slightly inclined state, and moves the plate-shaped bottom member formed as the bottom surface of the flow path through which the game ball flows down in the front-back direction to move the bottom surface. The game ball is changed to an open state (also referred to as an open state) in which a game ball can be won in a special winning opening located below the member and a closed state (also referred to as a closed state) in which the game ball cannot be won. Special variable winning ball device 7, in the jackpot gaming state that occurs when the specific display result (big hit symbol) is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B, the bottom member is moved forward. The bottom member is moved backward from the closed state in which the forward movement is performed toward the rear, and the opening control is performed to open the special winning opening, which is the winning area.

Below the special variable winning ball device 7, there are provided a special variable winning ball device 17 forming a special winning port for a small hit, and a variable winning ball device 6B having a second starting winning port, as shown in FIG. As shown in, the special variable winning ball device 17 is arranged on the left side, and the variable winning ball device 6B is arranged adjacent to the right side on the right side. These special variable winning ball device 17 and variable winning ball device 6B extend in the left-right direction in a slightly inclined state, and a plate-shaped bottom member formed as the bottom surface of the flow path through which the game ball flows down in the front-back direction. By moving the ball back and forth, a special winning opening or a second starting winning opening located below the bottom member allows the game ball to win a prize (also called an open state) and the game ball cannot win a prize. Say). The special variable winning ball device 17 is a small hit game state that occurs when a predetermined display result (small hit design) is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B. The bottom member is moved backward from the closed state in which the forward movement is performed forward, and the opening control is performed to open the special winning opening, which is the winning area. Further, the variable winning ball device 6B, when the normal symbol display device 20 hits and displays the symbol, the bottom member is moved backward from the closed state in which the bottom member is moved forward toward the front, The opening control for opening the second starting winning opening, which is the winning area, is executed.

In this example, the special variable winning ball device 7, the special variable winning ball device 17, and the variable winning ball device 6B are formed to have the same structure. Further, as shown in FIG. 1, the special variable winning ball device 7 is formed in such a manner that the bottom surface member is slightly inclined from the upper left to the lower right, so that the game ball dropped on the special variable winning ball device 7 is If the special variable winning ball device 7 is in the closed state, the special variable winning ball device 7 moves on the special variable winning ball device 7 from the upper left to the lower right, and falls on the variable winning ball device 6B below it.

Further, in this example, the special variable winning ball device 17 is slightly larger than the variable winning ball device 6B. Further, as shown in FIG. 1, the special variable winning ball device 17 and the variable winning ball device 6B are formed such that the bottom surface members are slightly inclined from the upper right to the lower left, so the special variable winning ball device 17 and the variable winning ball device 6B are variable. If the special variable winning ball device 17 or the variable winning ball device 6B is closed, the game ball on the winning ball device 6B moves from the upper right to the lower left on the special variable winning ball device 17 or the variable winning ball device 6B. Go. Further, as shown in FIG. 1, since the special variable winning ball device 17 and the variable winning ball device 6B are arranged adjacent to each other, the special variable winning ball device 7 does not win the special variable winning ball device 6B. If the bottom member of the variable winning ball device 6B is moved backward and the second starting winning port is in the open state, the gaming ball dropped to the second starting winning port is a special variable winning ball. The game ball does not flow toward the device 17. On the other hand, if the second start winning hole is not open, the game ball moves on the bottom member of the variable winning ball device 6B and is guided to the special variable winning ball device 17. At this time, if the bottom member of the special variable winning ball device 17 is moved backward and the special winning opening is open, the gaming ball wins the special winning opening. Furthermore, if the special winning opening is not in the open state, the game ball moves on the bottom member of the special variable winning ball device 17 and drops to the out opening as it is.

Further, in this example, the special variable winning ball device 7, the special variable winning ball device 17, and the variable winning ball device 6B are formed with a plurality of restricting pieces for reducing the flow-down speed of the game balls flowing down on the bottom surface member. There is. In the present example, the special variable winning ball device 7, the special variable winning ball device 17, and the variable winning ball device 6B are provided with the restriction pieces, so that the game flows downward from the upper left to the lower right or from the upper right to the lower left. The flow direction of the game ball is changed so that the ball meanders with the movement of the front-back direction component, and the time required for the flow is delayed compared to the case without the restriction piece.

In this example, as shown in FIG. 1, the special variable winning ball device 17 is arranged on the left side, and the variable winning ball device 6B is arranged on the right side. The bottom member of the ball device 6B is formed so as to gently incline from the upper right to the lower left, and when the bottom member is not retracted and is in the closed state, the variable winning ball device 6B is changed to the special variable winning ball device. Since the game balls are configured to flow toward 17, in this sense, the variable winning ball device 6B is provided on the upstream side, and the special variable winning ball device 17 is provided on the downstream side. Can be said.

Inside the special winning opening, there is provided a switch (first count switch 23) capable of detecting a game ball winning in the special winning opening. When the game ball is detected by the first count switch 23, a predetermined number (for example, 15) of game balls are paid out as a prize ball based on the detection information. Therefore, when the special variable winning ball device 7 is controlled to be opened and the special winning opening is opened, it becomes a state advantageous to the player. On the other hand, if the special variable winning ball device 7 is controlled to be closed and the special winning opening is closed, the player cannot pass the game ball into the special winning opening to get the winning ball. You will be at a disadvantage.

Inside the special winning opening, a switch (second count switch 24) capable of detecting the game ball winning in the special winning opening is provided. When a game ball is detected by the second count switch 24, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as a prize ball based on the detection information. Here, when the game ball passes (enters) the special winning opening that is opened in the special variable winning ball device 17, the number of the winning balls is smaller than that when the gaming ball wins the big winning opening, For example, more prize balls are paid out than when the game balls pass (enter) other prize holes such as the first start prize hole 1 and the second start prize hole. Therefore, if the special variable winning a prize ball device 17 is controlled to be opened and the special winning opening is opened, it becomes a state advantageous to the player. On the other hand, if the special variable winning a prize ball device 17 is controlled to be closed and the special winning opening is closed, the player cannot pass the game ball to the special winning opening to get the prize ball. You will be at a disadvantage.

Further, in the second starting winning opening, a second starting opening switch 22B capable of detecting the game ball winning in the second starting winning opening is provided. When the game ball is detected by the second starting opening switch 22B, a predetermined number (one) of game balls are paid out as a prize ball based on the detection information.

Hereinafter, the first start winning opening and the second starting winning opening may be collectively referred to as a starting winning opening or a starting opening.

In this pachinko gaming machine 1, the passage gate 41, the special variable winning ball device 7 (large winning hole), the variable winning ball device 6B (second starting winning port), and the special variable winning ball device 17 (special winning port). Is provided on the right side of the game area, so when the player is in a big hit game or in the KT state (so-called small hit time), the player aims at the right side of the game area (a so-called right hitting operation). )I do.

At predetermined positions of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, four places on the left and right lower sides of the game area), there are provided general winning openings 10 which are always kept open by a predetermined ball receiving member. In this case, when one of the general winning openings 10 is entered, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

The entry of a game ball into each prize hole including the general prize hole 10 is also referred to as a "prize". In particular, winning at the starting openings (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening starting opening) is also referred to as starting winning.

At a predetermined position of the game board 2 (on the left side of the game area in the example shown in FIG. 1), a normal symbol display device 20 is provided. As an example, the normal symbol display device 20 includes a 7-segment LED or the like, and performs a variable display of a normal symbol as a plurality of types of normal identification information different from the special symbol. Ordinary symbols are represented by numbers indicating "0" to "9" and lighting patterns such as "-". The normal pattern may include a pattern in which all the LEDs are turned off. Such variable display of ordinary symbols is also called a universal symbol game.

Above the normal symbol display device 20, a universal symbol holding display device 25C is provided. The universal figure pending display 25C is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and displays the number of stored universal figure pending memories, which is the number of universal figure pending games whose execution is suspended, by the number of lit LEDs.

In addition, in this pachinko gaming machine 1, since the variation display of the normal symbol is executed based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the passage gate 41, the passage gate 41 plays a role as a normal starting area. However, even when the big hit symbol is derived and displayed, since the big hit game state is entered based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the pass gate 41, the pass gate 41 also plays a role as an operation area. Therefore, the passage gate 41 is configured as a dual-purpose gate that serves as both a normal starting region and an operating region.

In addition to the above configuration, the surface of the game board 2 is provided with a windmill and a large number of obstacle nails that change the flow direction and speed of the game ball. At the lowermost part of the game area, there is provided an outlet for taking in the game balls that have not entered any of the winning openings.

Speakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at upper and left upper positions of the gaming machine frame 3, and a game effect frame LED 9 is provided in the periphery of the game area. ..

At a predetermined position (not shown in FIG. 1) of the game board 2, a movable body 32 that operates according to the effect is provided.

At the lower right position of the gaming machine frame 3, there is provided a hit ball operation handle (operation knob) 30 operated by a player or the like to shoot a game ball toward a game area by a hit ball launching device.

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the game area, a gaming ball paid out as a prize ball or a gaming ball rented out by a predetermined ball lending machine is held (stored) so as to be supplied to a ball striking device. ) Is provided with a hit ball supply plate (upper plate). Below the upper plate, there is provided a hit ball supply plate (lower plate) from which prize balls are paid out when the upper plate is full.

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the game area, a stick controller 31A that can be held by a player and tilted is attached. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed by the player. The operation on the stick controller 31A is detected by the controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 2).

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the game area, there is provided a push button 31B that allows the player to perform a predetermined instruction operation such as a pressing operation. The operation on the push button 31B is detected by the push sensor 35B (see FIG. 2).

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B are provided as detection means for detecting the action (operation etc.) of the player, but detection means other than these may be provided.

(Outline of game progression)
In this pachinko gaming machine 1, when the gaming state is the normal state, it is advantageous for the player to perform a shooting operation (so-called left hitting operation) aiming at the left side of the game area. When the player makes a left-hand hitting operation by rotating the hitting ball operation handle 30 of the pachinko gaming machine 1 by the player, and the game ball enters the first starting winning opening formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special symbol display The first special figure game by the device 4A is started.

In addition, when the game ball enters into the starting winning opening (winning prize) during the period during execution of the special drawing game, or during the period when it is controlled to the big hitting game state or the small hitting game state described later (starting winning occurs, If the special drawing game based on the starting prize cannot be immediately executed), the special drawing game based on the entry is suspended until a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

In the first special symbol game, if a specific special symbol (big hit symbol, for example, "7", actual symbol differs depending on the jackpot type described later.) as a fixed special symbol is stopped and displayed, it becomes "big hit". .. Also, if a special symbol different from the jackpot symbol (missing symbol, for example, "-") is stopped and displayed, "missing" is indicated. Even in the first special figure game, the small hit symbol may be stopped and displayed at an extremely low rate, and the small hit symbol may be "small hit".

After the display result in the first special figure game becomes "big hit", the big hit game state is controlled as an advantageous state advantageous to the player, provided that the game ball has passed through the passage gate 41.

In the big hit game state, the special winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined manner. The open state is one of the elapse timing of a predetermined period (for example, 29 seconds or 1.8 seconds) and the timing until the number of game balls entering the special winning opening reaches a predetermined number (for example, 9). It continues until the earlier of the two. The predetermined period is an upper limit period during which the special winning opening can be opened in one round, and is also referred to as an open upper limit period hereinafter. In this way, one cycle in which the special winning opening is opened is called a round (round game). In the big hit game state, the round can be repeatedly executed until a predetermined upper limit number (15 times or 2 times) is reached.

In the big hit game state, the player can get the prize ball by entering the game ball into the special winning opening. Therefore, the big hit game state is an advantageous state for the player. The larger the number of rounds in the big hit game state, and the longer the open upper limit period, the more advantageous for the player.

In addition, the "big hit" is set to the big hit type. For example, multiple types of opening mode (number of rounds and opening upper limit period) of the special winning opening and a plurality of types of game states after the big hit game state (normal state, probability variation state (high probability state), KT state, high base state, etc.) are prepared. The jackpot type is set according to these. As the big hit type, a big hit type that can obtain a large number of prize balls, or a big hit type that has few prize balls or almost no prize balls may be provided.

After the big hit game state is finished, it may be controlled to a certain variation state, a KT state, or a high base state according to the big hit type.

In the probability variation state (probability variation state), the probability variation control is performed so that the probability that the display result is "big hit" is higher than that in the normal state. The probability variation state is a state that is more advantageous to the player because it is a state in which the variation efficiency of the special symbol is improved and a "big hit" is likely to occur.

In the KT state, the KT control that is more likely to make a small hit than in the normal state is executed. With this pachinko gaming machine 1, since a certain amount of prize balls can be obtained even in the small hitting game state, compared to the large hitting game state, a small number of prize balls can be obtained, but this is an advantageous state for the player.

In the high base state, the control (time saving control) that shortens the average special map change time (period during which the special map changes) compared to the normal state is executed (time saving state), and it is called "Public hit" in the normal figure game. By increasing the probability of becoming higher than in the normal state, the control that makes it easier for the game ball to enter the second starting winning opening (high opening control, high base control) is also executed. The high base state is a state in which the variation efficiency of the special symbol (particularly the second special symbol) is improved, which is an advantageous state for the player.

The probability change state, the KT state, and the high base state are continued until one of the ending conditions such as that the special figure game has been executed a predetermined number of times and the next big hit game state has been started is satisfied. To do. The condition that the end condition is that the special figure game is executed a predetermined number of times is also referred to as the number of times cut (variation of the number of times probability).

The normal state is an advantageous state such as a big hit game state that is advantageous to the player, a game state other than a special state such as a probability change state, a KT state, and a high base state, and the display result in the special figure game is "big hit". The pachinko gaming machine 1 such as the probability of becoming the same as the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the initial setting state (for example, when the system is reset, when the predetermined return processing is not executed after power-on) is controlled. It is in a state of being.

When the big hit game is finished and the game state is controlled to the probability change state, the KT state, or the high base state, it is advantageous for the player to carry out a firing operation (right hitting operation) aiming at the right side of the game area. When the player makes a right-hand hitting operation by rotating the hitting ball operation handle 30 of the pachinko gaming machine 1 by the player and the gaming ball passes through the passage gate 41, the normal figure game by the normal symbol display device 20 is started. When the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 during the previous execution period of the general education game (when the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 but cannot immediately execute the general education game based on the passage) , The universal figure game based on the passage is suspended until a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

In this ordinary figure game, if a specific ordinary symbol (a symbol for a regular symbol) is stopped and displayed, the display result of the ordinary symbol is "per ordinary symbol". On the other hand, as a fixed ordinary symbol, if a normal symbol other than the regular symbol (normal symbol lost symbol) is stopped and displayed, the display result of the ordinary symbol becomes "normal symbol lost". When the "universal figure hit" is reached, the opening control is performed to open the variable winning ball device 6B for a predetermined period (the second start winning port is opened).

When the game ball enters the second starting winning hole formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, the second special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B is started.

In the second special figure game, if a specific special symbol (big hit symbol, for example, "7", the actual symbol differs depending on the jackpot type described later.) as a fixed special symbol is stopped and displayed, it becomes a "big hit", If a predetermined special symbol different from the big hit symbol (small hit symbol, for example, "2") is stopped and displayed, it is a "small hit". In addition, if a special symbol (missing symbol, for example, "-") different from the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed, the symbol is "missing".

After the display result in the second special figure game is "big hit", the big hit game state is controlled as an advantageous state advantageous to the player, provided that the game ball has passed through the passage gate 41. After the display result in the second special figure game is "small hit", the small hit game state is controlled.

In the small hitting game state, the special winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 17 is opened in a predetermined opening manner. As with the big hit type, a small hit type may be provided for the "small hit".

After the small hit game state is over, the game state is not changed, and the game state before the special figure game display result is "small hit" is continuously controlled (however, "small hit" occurs If the special figure game at that time is the predetermined number of special figure games in the above-mentioned number of times cut, the game state is naturally changed).

The gaming state may change based on that the game ball has passed a specific area (for example, a specific area in the special winning opening) during the big hit gaming state. For example, when the game ball passes through a specific area, it may be controlled to be in a certain change state after the big hit game state.

(Progress, etc.)
In the pachinko gaming machine 1, various effects (effects of notifying the progress of the game or enlivening the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. The effect will be described below. The effect is performed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5. However, in addition to or instead of the display, sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R and/or a point of the frame LED 9 is displayed. It may be performed by turning on/off the light, the operation of the movable body 32, or the like.

As effects to be executed according to the progress of the game, in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R provided in the image display device 5, the first special figure game or the first special figure game is displayed. In response to the start of the 2 special figure game, the variable display of the decorative pattern is started. At the timing when the display result (also referred to as a fixed special symbol) is stopped and displayed in the first special figure game and the second special figure game, the fixed decorative symbol (a combination of three decorative symbols) becomes the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol. ) Is also stopped (derived).

In the period from the start to the end of the variable display of the decorative pattern, the variable display mode of the decorative pattern may be a predetermined reach mode (reach is established). Here, with the reach mode, when the decorative design stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 constitutes a part of the big hit combination described later, the decorative design which is not yet stopped and displayed is variably displayed. Is an aspect that continues.

In addition, the reach effect is executed in response to the above-mentioned reach mode during the variable display of the decorative pattern. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the proportion of the display result (the display result of the special drawing game or the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern) that is a “big hit” (also called a big hit reliability or a big hit expectation degree) according to the effect mode. Different types of reach effects are executed. Reach productions include, for example, normal reach and super-reach, which has higher jackpot reliability than normal reach.

When the display result of the special figure game is "big hit", a fixed decorative pattern which is a predetermined big hit combination is derived as a display result of the variable display of the decorative design on the screen of the image display device 5 (decoration) The display result of the variable display of the pattern is "big hit"). As an example, the same decorative pattern (for example, "7") is stopped and displayed together on a predetermined effective line in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. ..

In the case of "probability variation jackpot" that is controlled to the probability variation state after the jackpot gaming state is finished, odd decorative patterns (for example, "7", etc.) are also stopped and displayed, and after the jackpot gaming state is transformed to the probability variation state. In the case of "uncertain variation big hit (normal big hit)" that is not controlled, an even number of decorative symbols (for example, "6" etc.) may be stopped and displayed together. In this case, the odd decorative pattern is also referred to as a probability variation design, and the even decoration pattern is also referred to as a non-probability variation design (normal design). After the reach mode is achieved with the non-probability variation pattern, the promotion effect that finally becomes the “probability variation jackpot” may be executed.

When the display result of the special figure game is "small hit", as a display result of the variable display of the decorative design on the screen of the image display device 5, a fixed decorative design (for example, "" 1 3 5”) is derived (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is “small hit”). As an example, the decorative patterns forming the chances are stopped and displayed on the predetermined effective lines in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. It should be noted that the display result of the special figure game is "big hit" of some big hit types (big hit type of big hit game state in the same mode as the small hit game state) and when it is "small hit". , A common fixed decorative pattern may be derived and displayed.

When the display result of the special drawing game is “miss”, the variable display mode of the decorative design does not become the reach mode, but as the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern, the fixed decorative pattern of the non-reach combination (“ (Also referred to as "non-reach lost") may be stopped (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is "non-reach lost"). Further, when the display result is "miss", after the variable display mode of the decorative pattern becomes the reach mode, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is a predetermined reach combination other than the jackpot combination ("reach miss"). (Also referred to as) fixed display may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative design is "reach lost").

The effects that can be executed by the pachinko gaming machine 1 include displaying the variable display corresponding display (hold display or active display). Further, as another effect, for example, a notice effect that gives a notice of the jackpot reliability is executed during the variable display of the decorative pattern. The notice production includes a notice production that announces the jackpot reliability in the variable display being executed and a look-ahead notice production that announces the jackpot reliability in the variable display before execution (variable display in which execution is suspended). As the prefetching notice effect, an effect of changing the display mode of the variable display corresponding display (hold display or active display) to a mode different from the normal mode may be executed.

Further, in the image display device 5, once the decorative design is temporarily stopped during the variable display of the decorative design, and then the variable display is resumed, one variable display can be simulated like multiple variable display. You may make it perform a pseudo continuous production.

Even during the big hit game state, a big hit mid-game production for notifying the big hit game state is executed. As the big hit performance, an effect for notifying the number of rounds or a promotion effect showing that the value of the big hit game state is improved may be executed. In addition, during the small hitting game state, the small hitting production which notifies the small hitting game state is executed. In addition, during the small hitting game state, in some big hitting type (the big hitting type of the big hitting game state of the form similar to the small hitting game state, for example, the big hitting type which makes the following game state the high-precision state) big hitting game By executing a common effect depending on the state, the player may not be able to know whether the present is in the small hitting game state or the big hitting game state. In such a case, by performing a common effect after the end of the small hit game state and after the end of the big hit game state, it is not possible to distinguish between the high-accuracy state and the low-precision state. May be.

Further, for example, when the special drawing game or the like is not executed, a demo (demonstration) image is displayed on the image display device 5 (a customer waiting demonstration effect is executed).

(Substrate configuration)
The pachinko gaming machine 1 is equipped with, for example, a main board 11, a performance control board 12, a sound control board 13, an LED control board 14, a relay board 15, etc. as shown in FIG. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, a launch control board, and a power supply board are arranged on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and progresses in the above-mentioned game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (execution of special figure game (including hold management), execution of general figure game (including hold management), big hit It has a function of controlling a gaming state, a small hitting gaming state, a gaming state, etc. The main board 11 has a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, a solenoid circuit 111, and the like.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, and a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103. , A random number circuit 104 and an I/O (Input/Output port) 105.

The CPU 103 executes a program stored in the ROM 101 to perform a process of controlling the progress of the game (a process of realizing the function of the main board 11). At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (variation patterns described below, effect control commands described below, data such as various tables referred to when making various determinations described below) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as a main memory. . The RAM 102 is a backup RAM in which the stored contents are saved for a predetermined period even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped partially or entirely. Alternatively, all or part of the program stored in the ROM 101 may be expanded in the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102.

The random number circuit 104 counts the numerical value data indicating various random number values (game random numbers) used when controlling the progress of the game in an updatable manner. The game random number may be updated by the CPU 103 executing a predetermined computer program (updated by software).

The I/O 105 is, for example, an input port to which various signals (detection signals described later) are input, and various signals (first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, ordinary symbol display device 20, first hold) An output port for transmitting a signal for controlling (driving) the display 25A, the second hold indicator 25B, the universal figure hold indicator 25C, and the like, and an output port for transmitting the signal.

The switch circuit 110 includes various switches for detecting game balls (gate switch 21, starting opening switch (first starting opening switch 22A and second starting opening switch 22B), count switch (first counting switch 23 and second counting switch 24). )) is taken in and transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100 by taking in a detection signal (a detection signal indicating that the switch has been turned on due to a game ball passing or entering). The transmission of the detection signal means that the passage or entry of the game ball has been detected.

The solenoid circuit 111 receives a solenoid drive signal (for example, a signal for turning on the solenoid 81, the solenoid 82, the solenoid 83, etc.) from the game control microcomputer 100 for the solenoid 81 for the ordinary electric accessory and the special winning opening door. It is transmitted to the solenoid 82 and the solenoid 83 for the special winning opening.

The main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100), as a part of the control of the progress of the game, production control board (command for designating (notifying) the progress status of the game, etc.) according to the progress of the game. Supply to 12. The effect control command output from the main board 11 is relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the effect control board 12. The effect control command includes, for example, various determination results on the main board 11 (for example, a display result of the special figure game (including a big hit type), a variation pattern used when the special figure game is executed (details will be described later). )), the status of the game (for example, the start and end of variable display, the status of opening of the special winning opening, the occurrence of winnings, the number of reserved memories, the game status), the command for specifying the occurrence of an error, and the like.

The effect control board 12 is a sub-side control board that is independent of the main board 11, receives an effect control command, and effects based on the received effect control command (various effects according to the progress of the game, It has a function of executing various notifications such as driving of the movable body 32, error notification, and notification of power failure recovery.

On the effect control board 12, an effect control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control section 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I/O 125 are mounted.

The effect control CPU 120 executes a program stored in the ROM 121, thereby performing a process together with the display control unit 123 (a process for realizing the above-described function of the effect control board 12, and an effect to be executed). (Including the determination of). At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 is used, and the RAM 122 is used as a main memory.

The effect control CPU 120 displays the effect execution based on a detection signal from the controller sensor unit 35A or the push sensor 35B (a signal that is output when an operation by the player is detected, and is a signal that appropriately indicates the operation content). The control unit 123 may be instructed.

The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CGROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), and the like, and executes an effect based on an effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120.

The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to display the effect image by supplying the image display device 5 with a video signal according to the effect to be executed based on the effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120. The display control unit 123 further outputs a sound in synchronization with the display of the effect image and turns on/off the frame LED 9 and the right-handing notification LED 37. Therefore, the sound control signal (a signal that specifies a sound to be output) is voice-controlled. The LED signal is supplied to the substrate 13 or an LED signal (a signal designating the lighting/extinguishing state of the LED) is supplied to the LED control substrate 14. In addition, the display control unit 123 supplies a signal for operating the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or a drive circuit that drives the movable body 32.

The voice control board 13 is equipped with various circuits for driving the speakers 8L, 8R, drives the speakers 8L, 8R based on the sound designating signal, and outputs the sound designated by the sound designating signal from the speakers 8L, 8R. Let

The LED control board 14 is equipped with various circuits for driving the frame LED 9 and the right-handing notification LED 37, drives the frame LED 9 and the right-handing notification LED 37 based on the LED signal, and specifies the LED signal. The frame LED 9 and the right hitting notification LED 37 are turned on/off. In this way, the display control unit 123 controls audio output and turning on/off of the LED.

It should be noted that the production control CPU 120 executes audio output, control of turning on/off the LED (supply of sound designation signal or LED signal, etc.), control of the movable body 32 (supply of signal for operating the movable body 32, etc.). You may do it.

The random number circuit 124 updatable counts the numerical data indicating various random number values (random numbers for effect) used for executing various effects. The effect random number may be updated by the effect control CPU 120 executing a predetermined computer program (updated by software).

The I/O 125 mounted on the production control board 12 transmits, for example, an input port for receiving the production control command transmitted from the main board 11 and various signals (video signal, sound designation signal, LED signal). And an output port of.

Substrates other than the main substrate 11, such as the effect control substrate 12, the sound control substrate 13, and the LED control substrate 14, are also referred to as sub substrates. A plurality of sub-boards may be provided for each function like the pachinko gaming machine 1, or one sub-board may be configured to have a plurality of functions.

(motion)
Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described.

(Main operation of main board 11)
First, the main operation of the main board 11 will be described. When the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes the game control main processing. FIG. 3 is a flowchart showing the game control main processing executed by the CPU 103 on the main board 11.

In the game control main process shown in FIG. 3, the CPU 103 first sets an interrupt prohibition (step S1). Then, necessary initial setting is performed (step S2). The initial settings include stack pointer settings, internal device (CTC (counter/timer circuit), parallel input/output port, etc.) register settings, settings for making the RAM 102 accessible, and the like.

Next, it is determined whether the output signal from the clear switch is on (step S3). The clear switch is mounted on the power supply board, for example. When the power is turned on with the clear switch turned on, an output signal (clear signal) is input to the game control microcomputer 100 via the input port. When the output signal from the clear switch is on (step S3; Yes), the initialization process (step S8) is executed. In the initialization process, the CPU 103 performs a RAM clear process for clearing flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102, and sets an initial value in the work area.

Further, the CPU 103 transmits an effect control command instructing initialization to the effect control board 12 (step S9). When the effect control command is received, the effect control CPU 120 displays a screen for notifying that the control of the gaming machine has been initialized, for example, in the image display device 5.

If the output signal from the clear switch is not on (step S3; No), it is determined whether backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (backup RAM) (step S4). When the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped due to an unexpected power failure or the like (power cut), the CPU 103 executes the power supply stop time process immediately before the pachinko gaming machine 1 stops operating due to the stop of the power supply. In this power supply stop process, a process of turning on a backup flag indicating that data is backed up in the RAM 102, a data protection process of the RAM 102, and the like are executed. The data protection processing includes processing for adding an error detection code (checksum, parity bit, etc.) and backing up various data. The data to be backed up includes various data (including various flags, states of various timers, etc.) for advancing the game, the state of the backup flag and an error detection code. In step S4, it is determined whether the backup flag is on. When the backup flag is off and the backup data is not stored in the RAM 102 (step S4; No), the initialization process (step S8) is executed.

When the backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (step S4; Yes), the CPU 103 checks the data of the backed up data (performed by using the error detection code) and determines whether or not the data is normal (step). S5). In step S5, it is determined whether or not the data in the RAM 102 matches the data at the time when the power supply is stopped, for example, based on the parity bit and the checksum. If it is determined that they match, the data in the RAM 102 is determined to be normal.

When it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is not normal (step S5; No), the internal state cannot be returned to the state at the time of stopping the power supply, so the initialization process (step S8) is executed.

When it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal (step S5; Yes), the CPU 103 performs a recovery process (step S6) for returning the internal state of the main board 11 to the state when the power supply was stopped. In the restoration process, the CPU 103 sets the work area based on the stored contents of the RAM 102 (contents of backed up data). As a result, the game state is restored when the power supply is stopped, and if the special symbol is changing, the variation of the special symbol is restarted from the state before the restoration by executing the game control timer interrupt process described later. Will be.

And CPU103 transmits the production control command which directs recovery from power failure to production control board 12 (Step S7). Along with this, a production control command for designating a backed-up game state before power interruption, and a production control for designating the display result of the special figure game being executed when the special figure game is being executed. You may make it transmit a command. These commands can use the same commands as the commands set for transmission in the special symbol process processing described later. When the production control CPU 120 receives the production control command that specifies the time of recovery from power failure, for example, the image display device 5 notifies that recovery from power failure has been performed or is being recovered from power failure. The screen is displayed to The effect control CPU 120 may display an appropriate screen based on the effect control command.

After finishing the restoration process or the initialization process and transmitting the production control command to the production control board 12, the CPU 103 executes a random number circuit setting process for initializing the random number circuit 104 (step S10). Then, the CTC register built in the game control microcomputer 100 is set so that a timer interrupt is taken at regular intervals (for example, 2 ms) (step S11), and interrupts are permitted (step S12). ). Then, the loop processing is started. After that, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute timer interrupt processing.

When the CPU 103 that has executed the game control main process receives the interrupt request signal from the CTC and accepts the interrupt request, it executes the game control timer interrupt process shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 4 is started, the CPU 103 first executes a predetermined switch process to execute the predetermined switch process, so that the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, and the second start port are performed via the switch circuit 110. Whether or not the detection signals are received from various switches such as the switch 22B, the first count switch 23, and the second count switch 24 is determined (step S21). Then, by executing a predetermined main side error processing, an abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is performed, and a warning can be issued if necessary according to the diagnosis result (step S22). After that, by executing a predetermined information output process, for example, jackpot information (information indicating the number of occurrences of jackpots) supplied to a hall management computer installed outside the pachinko gaming machine 1, starting information (starting) Data such as information indicating the number of winnings and the like, probability variation information (information indicating the number of times the probability has changed, etc.) is output (step S23).

Following the information output process, a game random number update process for updating at least a part of the game random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software is executed (step S24). After that, the CPU 103 executes the first special symbol process process (step S25A). The CPU 103 executes the first special symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, thereby realizing the execution and suspension management of the first special symbol game (details will be described later). Further, the CPU 103 executes the second special symbol process process (step S25B). The CPU 103 executes the second special symbol process process for each timer interrupt, so that execution and suspension management of the second special symbol game are realized. In addition, in this pachinko gaming machine 1, it is possible to simultaneously perform the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol in parallel.

Subsequent to the first special symbol process process and the second special symbol process process, the CPU 103 executes an accessory control process process (step S25C). The CPU 103 executes the accessory control process process for each timer interrupt, thereby realizing control of the big hit game state and the small hit game state, control of the game state, etc. (details will be described later).

Following the accessory control process process, a normal symbol process process is executed (step S26). CPU103 executes normal symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the game ball passing through the passage gate 41) execution and hold management, It is possible to control the opening of the variable winning ball device 6B based on "universal figure hit". The ordinary figure game is executed by driving the ordinary symbol display device 20, and the number of ordinary figure reservations is displayed by turning on the ordinary figure hold indicator 25C.

After executing the normal symbol process process, as a part of the game control timer interrupt process, a process when an electric power interruption occurs, a process for paying out a prize ball, etc. may be performed. After that, the CPU 103 executes command control processing (step S27). The CPU 103 may set the transmission of the effect control command in each of the above processes. In the command control process of step S27, a process of transmitting the effect control command set for transmission to the sub-side control board such as the effect control board 12 is performed. After executing the command control process, the interrupt is permitted, and then the game control timer interrupt process is ended.

Although not shown in FIG. 4, in the game control timer interrupt process, a test terminal for outputting a test signal for making it possible to confirm the control state of the game machine outside the game machine. Processing is also executed. In the test terminal process, the CPU 103 performs control to output a test signal (right-handed test signal) that can specify that the right-handed operation is being performed. Specifically, in the test terminal processing, the CPU 103 performs control to output a right-handed test signal during the big hit game, the small hit game based on the variable display of the second special symbol, and the KT state. On the other hand, in the test terminal processing, the CPU 103 does not perform the control of outputting the right-hand hitting test signal during the small hitting game based on the variable display of the first special symbol.

FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing an example of processing executed in step S25A shown in FIG. 4 as the first special symbol process processing. In the first special symbol process process, the CPU 103 first executes a first start winning determination process (step S101A).

In the first start winning a prize determination process, a process of detecting the occurrence of a start winning to the first starting prize hole, storing the hold information in a predetermined area of the RAM 102, and updating the first hold storage number is executed. When the start winning award to the first start winning a prize mouth occurs, a random number value for determining the display result (including the big hit type) and the variation pattern is extracted and stored in the first holding storage buffer provided in the RAM 102 as holding information. To be done. In addition, a process of pre-reading a display result or a variation pattern may be executed based on the extracted random number value. After storing the hold information and the first hold storage number, the transmission for transmitting the effect control command for designating the determination result such as the occurrence of the start winning, the first hold storage number, and the look-ahead determination on the effect control board 12. Settings are made. The effect control command at the time of the start winning set to be transmitted in this way is, for example, effect control from the main board 11 by executing the command control processing of step S27 shown in FIG. 4 after the first special symbol process processing is completed. It is transmitted to the substrate 12.

After executing the first start winning determination process in S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes any of the processes of steps S110A to S113A in accordance with the value of the first special figure process flag provided in the RAM 102. In each process of the first special symbol process process (steps S110A to S113A), a transmission setting for transmitting an effect control command corresponding to each process to the effect control board 12 is performed.

The first special symbol normal process of step S110A is executed when the value of the first special symbol process flag is "0" (initial value). In the first special symbol normal process, it is determined whether or not to start the first special symbol game, based on the presence or absence of the hold information. Further, in the first special symbol normal process, based on the random number value for determining the display result, whether the display result of the first special symbol or the decorative symbol is "big hit" or "small hit" and "big hit" In this case, the jackpot type is determined (predetermined) before the display result is derived and displayed. Furthermore, in the first special symbol normal processing, a fixed special symbol (either a big hit symbol, a small hit symbol, or a lost symbol) to be stopped and displayed in the first special symbol game is set according to the determined display result. .. After that, the value of the first special symbol process flag is updated to "1", and the first special symbol normal process ends.

When making various decisions based on the random number values, various tables stored in the ROM 101 (tables in which decision values that are compared with random number values are assigned to decision results) are referenced. The same applies to other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the effect control board 12. In the effect control board 12, various tables are stored in the ROM 121.

The first variation pattern setting process of step S111A is executed when the value of the first special figure process flag is "1". In this first variation pattern setting process, a variation pattern is determined using a random number value for determining the variation pattern, based on a pre-determined result of whether or not the display result is “big hit” or “small hit”. It includes a process of determining which one. In the first fluctuation pattern setting process, when the fluctuation pattern is determined, the value of the first special figure process flag is updated to "2", and the first fluctuation pattern setting process ends.

The variation pattern is the execution time of the special figure game (special figure change time) (also the execution time of variable display of the decorative pattern), the mode of variable display of the decorative pattern (whether reach or not), the variable display of the decorative pattern. Is specified, and is also referred to as a variable display pattern.

The first special symbol variation process of step S112A is executed when the value of the first special symbol process flag is "2". In this first special symbol variation processing, the setting process for changing the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A, and the elapsed time from the start of the variation of the first special symbol is measured. It includes processing to do. Further, it is also determined whether or not the measured elapsed time has reached the special figure fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. Then, when the elapsed time from the start of the variation of the first special symbol reaches the special symbol variation time, the value of the first special symbol process flag is updated to "3", and the first special symbol variation process ends. To do.

In this example, since the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol can be executed in parallel, for example, the first special symbol variation process (step S112A), the first When the special symbols are being displayed in a variable manner, there may be small hits in the variable display of the second special symbols which are controlled by a small hit game. In this case, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) determines whether or not the small hit game is in progress (specifically, the value of the second special figure process flag is before the small hit opening). Process ~ determine whether or not the value is equivalent to the small hit end process), if the small hit game is not changing the value of the first special symbol process flag from the value corresponding to the first special symbol variation process Thus, if the small hit game is not in progress, the value of the first special symbol process flag can be updated to a value corresponding to the next first special symbol stop process. By performing such control, the variable display of the first special symbol is interrupted during the small hit game based on the variable display of the second special symbol, and the variable display of the first special symbol is restarted after the end of the small hit game. Control to do so. Incidentally, not only such control, for example, during the small hit game based on the variation display of the second special symbol, the process of measuring the elapsed time from the start of the variation of the first special symbol is interrupted (of the timer The update may be interrupted).

Further, for example, the small hit ending period as the small hit end processing period may be configured to be different depending on the gaming state. For example, in a normal state, if configured to suspend the variable display of the first special symbol, the suspension period of the variable display of the first special symbol becomes long, and the execution period and the suspension period of the variable display of the first special symbol If the difference becomes large, it is necessary to absorb the interruption period due to the stop of swinging of the decorative pattern, etc., resulting in a discomfort for the player. Therefore, in the normal state, it is desirable that the small hit ending period be shorter than that in the KT state (first KT state, second KT state). In this case, for example, the small hit ending period may be 0.5 seconds in the normal state, while the small hit ending period may be 3 seconds in the KT state.

Further, in the case of configuring as described above, for example, in the first KT state, since the game ball is practically difficult to win in the small hit control and no special effect is produced, the small hit ending period is shorter than that in the second KT state. It may be configured to do so. On the other hand, in the second KT state, the game ball is easy to win in the small hit control and an effect for emphasizing the small hit control is executed. Therefore, the small hit ending period may be made longer than that in the first KT state. .. In this case, for example, the small hitting ending period may be 0.5 seconds in the first KT state, while the small hitting ending period may be 3 seconds in the second KT state.

Further, as for the small hit fanfare period as the small hit opening pretreatment period, the length of the period may be changed depending on the gaming state, as in the above small hit ending period.

The first special symbol stop process of step S113A is executed when the value of the first special symbol process flag is "3". In this first special symbol stop process, to stop the variation of the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A, to stop display (derive) the confirmed special symbol that is the display result of the first special symbol It includes the process of setting. When the display result is "big hit", setting processing for starting the big hit game is performed. On the other hand, when the big hit flag is off and the display result is "small hit", processing for starting the small hit game is performed. Then, the value of the first special figure process flag is updated to "0". When the display result is "Small hit" or "Loss", the game state is updated when the probability variation state, the KT state, or the high base state is controlled, and when the end of the number of cuts is satisfied. .. When the value of the first special symbol process flag is updated, the first special symbol stop process ends.

The process executed in the second special symbol process process (step S25B) is the same as the process executed in the first special symbol process process (step S25A). That is, in the first special symbol process process described in FIG. 5, if "first" is read as "second", the second special symbol process process will be described. Further, each random number value extracted in the first start winning determination process of the second special symbol process process (step S25B) is stored in the second holding storage buffer provided in the RAM 102 as holding information.

In this example, the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol can be executed in parallel, so, for example, the second special symbol variation process is performed and the variation of the second special symbol is changed. When it is being displayed, it may be a small hit in the variable display of the first special symbol and may be controlled to a small hit game. In this case, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) determines whether or not the small hit game is in progress (specifically, the value of the first special figure process flag is before the small hit opening). Process ~ determine whether or not the value is equivalent to the small hit end process), if the small hit game is not changing the value of the second special symbol process flag from the value corresponding to the second special symbol variation process Thus, if the small hit game is not in progress, the value of the second special symbol process flag can be updated to a value corresponding to the next second special symbol stop process. By performing such control, during the small hit game based on the variable display of the first special symbol, the variable display of the second special symbol is interrupted, and the variable display of the second special symbol is restarted after the end of the small hit game. Control to do so. Not only such control, for example, during the small hit game based on the variation display of the first special symbol, the process of measuring the elapsed time from the start of the variation of the second special symbol is interrupted (of the timer The update may be interrupted).

Incidentally, with regard to the small hit control based on the variable display of the second special symbol, the length of the small hit fanfare period or the small hit ending period may be changed depending on the game state.

FIG. 6 is a flowchart showing an example of a process executed in step S25C shown in FIG. 4 as the accessory control process process. In this accessory control process process, the CPU 103 selects and executes any of the processes of steps S120 to S128 in accordance with the value of the accessory control process flag provided in the RAM 102. In addition, in each process (steps S120 to S128) of the accessory control process process, a transmission setting for transmitting an effect control command corresponding to each process to the effect control board 12 is performed.

The accessory control normal process of step S120 is executed when the value of the accessory control process flag is "0". In this accessory control normal process, whether or not the setting for starting the big hit game is monitored, and if the setting for starting the big hit game is made, the process for starting the big hit game is performed. The value of the accessory control process flag is updated to "1".

The gate passage waiting process of step S121 is executed when the value of the accessory control process flag is "1". In this gate passage waiting process, control is performed to wait for the game ball to pass through the passage gate 41. When the passage of the game ball to the passage gate 41 is detected, the value of the accessory control process flag is updated to "2".

The big hit opening preprocessing of step S122 is executed when the accessory control process flag is "2". This big hit opening preprocessing includes processing for starting the execution of the round in the big hit game state and setting the big winning opening in the open state based on that the display result is "big hit" Has been. When the special winning opening is opened, a process of supplying a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the special winning opening door is executed. At this time, for example, an upper limit opening period for opening the special winning opening and an upper limit number of executions of the round are set according to which the big hit type is. When these settings are completed, the value of the accessory control process flag is updated to "3", and the jackpot opening preprocessing is completed.

The big hit opening process in step S123 is executed when the value of the accessory control process flag is "3". In this big hit opening process, a process of measuring the elapsed time after the special winning opening is opened, the measured elapsed time, the number of game balls detected by the first count switch 23, and the like are determined. It includes processing for determining whether it is time to return the winning opening from the open state to the closed state. Then, when returning the special winning opening to the closed state, after performing a process of stopping the supply of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the special winning opening door, the value of the accessory control process flag is updated to "4". , The big hit opening process is ended.

The jackpot opening post-processing of step S124 is executed when the value of the accessory control process flag is "4". This big jackpot post-processing, processing to determine whether the number of executions of the round to open the big winning opening has reached the set upper limit number of executions, when the maximum number of executions has been reached, the big hit game state It includes the process of setting to terminate the. When the round execution count does not reach the upper limit execution count, the value of the accessory control process flag is updated to "3", while when the round execution count reaches the upper limit execution count, the accessory control process The value of the flag is updated to "5". When the value of the accessory control process flag is updated, the jackpot opening post-processing ends.

The big hit ending process of step S125 is executed when the value of the accessory control process flag is "5". This big hit end processing, waiting processing until the waiting time corresponding to the period during which the ending effect as the effect operation for notifying the end of the big hit game state is executed, or a certain change corresponding to the end of the big hit game state It includes control, KT control, processing for performing various settings for starting high base control, and the like. When such a setting is made, the value of the accessory control process flag is updated to "0", and the jackpot end process ends.

The small hit opening pre-processing of step S126 is executed when the value of the accessory control process flag is "6". This small hit opening pre-processing includes processing for setting the special winning opening to the open state in the small hit game state based on the display result of "small hit". At this time, the value of the accessory control process flag is updated to "7", and the small hit opening pretreatment ends.

The small hitting open process of step S127 is executed when the value of the accessory control process flag is "7". This small hit opening process is the process of measuring the elapsed time after opening the special winning opening and the timing of returning the special winning opening from the open state to the closed state based on the measured elapsed time etc. A process for determining whether or not it is included. When the special winning opening is returned to the closed state and the end timing of the small hitting game state comes, the value of the accessory control process flag is updated to "8", and the small hitting open process ends.

The small hit ending process of step S128 is executed when the value of the accessory control process flag is "8". This small hitting end process includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to a period during which the effect operation for notifying the end of the small hitting game state is executed. Here, when the small hit game state ends, the game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 before the small hit game state is continued. When the waiting time at the end of the small hit game state has elapsed, the value of the accessory control process flag is updated to "0", and the small hit end processing ends.

(Main operation of the production control board 12)
Next, the main operation of the effect control board 12 will be described. In the effect control board 12, when the power supply voltage is supplied from the power supply board or the like, the effect control CPU 120 is activated to execute effect control main processing as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 7. When the effect control main process shown in FIG. 7 is started, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a predetermined initialization process (step S71) to clear the RAM 122 and set various initial values, and to the effect control board 12. Register settings of the installed CTC (counter/timer circuit) are performed. Further, the initial operation control process is executed (step S72). In the initial operation control processing, control for performing an initial operation of the movable body 32 such as control for driving the movable body 32 to return to the initial position and control for confirming a predetermined operation are executed.

Then, it is determined whether or not the timer interrupt flag is on (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to the ON state each time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses based on the CTC register setting, for example. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (step S73; No), the process of step S73 is repeatedly executed and stands by.

On the side of the effect control board 12, an interrupt for receiving the effect control command from the main board 11 is generated in addition to the timer interrupt that is generated each time a predetermined time has elapsed. This interrupt is, for example, an interrupt generated when the effect control INT signal from the main board 11 is turned on. When an interrupt occurs due to the effect control INT signal being turned on, the effect control CPU 120 automatically sets the interrupt disable, but if a CPU that does not automatically enter the interrupt disable state is used, an interrupt occurs. It is desirable to issue a prohibition instruction (DI instruction). The effect control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to the interrupt caused by the effect control INT signal being turned on. In this command reception interrupt process, a performance control command is fetched from a predetermined input port of the input ports included in the I/O 125 that receives the control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15. The effect control command fetched at this time is stored in the effect control command receiving buffer provided in the RAM 122, for example. After that, the production control CPU 120 sets the interrupt permission, and then ends the command reception interrupt process.

If the timer interrupt flag is on in step S73 (step S73; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared to the off state (step S74), and the command analysis process is executed (step S75). In the command analysis process, for example, after reading various effect control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the effect control command reception buffer, the read effect control commands are read. Corresponding settings and controls are performed. For example, the read effect control command is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 or the RAM 122 is stored in the RAM 122 so that the effect control command received and the content specified by the effect control command can be confirmed by the effect control process processing or the like. The reception flag provided is turned on. When the effect control command specifies the game state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display a background according to the game state.

After the command analysis process is executed in step S75, the effect control process process is executed (step S76). In the effect control process processing, for example, an operation of displaying an effect image in the display area of the image display device 5, an operation of outputting audio from the speakers 8L and 8R, a lighting operation of a decorative light emitting body such as the frame LED 9 and a decorative LED, and driving of the movable body 32. Controls for operating various effect devices such as actions are performed. Further, with respect to the control contents of the effect operation using various effect devices, determination, determination, setting, etc. are performed according to the effect control commands transmitted from the main board 11.

Following the effect control process processing of step S76, effect random number updating processing is executed (step S77), and at least a part of the effect random numbers used on the effect control board 12 side is updated by software. Then, the process returns to step S73. Other processing may be executed before returning to the processing in step S73.

FIG. 8 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S76 of FIG. 7 as the effect control process process. In the effect control process process shown in FIG. 8, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a pre-reading notice setting process (step S161). In the pre-reading notice setting process, for example, determination, determination, setting, etc. for executing the pre-reading notice production are performed based on the production control command at the time of start winning transmitted from the main board 11. In addition, the processing for displaying the hold display is executed based on the number of hold memories specified from the effect control command.

After executing the process of step S161, the effect control CPU 120 selects and executes any one of the following processes of steps S170 to S177 according to the value of the effect process flag provided in the RAM 122, for example.

The variable display start waiting process of step S170 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "0" (initial value). This variable display start waiting process is a process of determining whether or not to start variable display of decorative symbols in the image display device 5, based on whether or not a command or the like specifying start of variable display is received from the main board 11. Etc. are included. When it is determined that the variable display of the decorative pattern on the image display device 5 is started, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "1", and the variable display start waiting process is ended.

The variable display start setting process in step S171 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "1". In this variable display start setting processing, based on the display result and the variation pattern specified by the effect control command, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern (fixed decorative pattern), the variable display mode of the decorative pattern, the reach effect and various The presence/absence of execution of various effects such as a notice effect, its mode, and execution start timing are determined. Then, the effect control pattern (collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute the effect) that reflects the determination result or the like is set. Then, based on the set effect control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start the variable display of the decorative pattern, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process is ended. The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to start the variable display of the decorative pattern in response to the instruction to start the variable display of the decorative pattern.

The variable display effect process in step S172 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "2". In the effect display during variable display, the effect control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display an effect image based on the effect control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5. Or driving the movable body 32, outputting voice or sound effect from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting a command (sound effect signal) to the sound control board 13, and sending a command (illumination signal) to the LED control board 14. Various effect control is performed during variable display of the decorative pattern, such as turning on/off/blinking the frame LED 9 and the decorative LED by output. After performing such effect control, for example, an end code indicating the variable display end of the decorative pattern is read from the effect control pattern, or a command designating that the fixed decorative pattern is stopped and displayed from the main board 11 is received. Corresponding to what has been done, the fixed decorative design which is the display result of the decorative design is stopped and displayed. When the fixed decorative pattern is stopped and displayed, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "3", and the variable display effect effect processing ends.

The special figure winning waiting process of step S173 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "3". In the special figure winning waiting process, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the effect control command for designating the start of the big hit game state or the small hit game state has been received from the main board 11. When a production control command for designating the start of the big hit game state or the small hit game state is received, if the command designates the start of the big hit game state, the value of the production process flag is set to "6." Update to ". On the other hand, if the command designates the start of the small hitting game state, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "4" which is a value corresponding to the effect processing during the small hitting. Further, when the waiting time for receiving the command is not received without receiving the command designating the big hit game state or the small hit game state, it is determined that the display result in the special figure game is “miss”. Then, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “0” which is the initial value. When the value of the production process flag is updated, the special figure hit waiting process ends.

The effect process during the small hit in step S174 is a process executed when the value of the effect control process flag is "4". In the effect processing during the small hit, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to the effect contents in the small hit game state, and executes various effect controls in the small hit game state based on the set contents. . Further, in the small hitting production process, for example, in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 to end the small winning game state, the value of the production process flag is set to a value corresponding to the small winning finish production. The value is updated to a certain "5", and the effect processing during the small hit is finished.

The small hit end production process of step S175 is a process executed when the value of the production control process flag is "5". In the small hitting end effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to the end of the small hit game state, and various effect controls at the end of the small hit game state based on the setting contents. To execute. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "0" which is the initial value, and the small hit end effect processing is ended.

The big hit midfield effect process in step S176 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "6". In this big hit mid effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to the effect contents in the big hit game state, and executes various effect controls in the big hit game state based on the setting contents. Further, in the big hit midfield effect process, the value of the effect control process flag is a value corresponding to the ending effect process, for example, in response to receiving a command designating termination of the big hit game state from the main board 11. It updates to "7" and finishes the big hit midfield effect process.

The ending effect process of step S177 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "7". In this ending effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to the end of the big hit game state, and performs various kinds of effect control of the ending effect at the end of the big hit game state based on the setting contents. Run. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "0" which is the initial value, and the ending effect process is ended.

(Variation of basic explanation)
The present invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the above basic description, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the spirit of the present invention.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the above basic description is a payout type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of game media as a prize based on the occurrence of a prize, but encloses the game medium and gives a score based on the occurrence of a prize. It may be an enclosed game machine.

What is displayed during variable display of the special symbol is only one type of symbol (for example, a symbol indicating "-"), and variable display may be performed by repeating display and extinction of the symbol. Further, even when the symbol is displayed during the variable display, the symbol may not be displayed when the variable display is stopped (the symbol indicating "-" may not be displayed as the display result).

In the above basic description, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is shown as a gaming machine, but a predetermined number of bets is set by inserting a medal, and a plurality of types of symbols are rotated according to the operation of the operation lever by the player, A slot machine capable of executing a game in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out to a player (for example, a big bonus when the stop symbol combination becomes a specific symbol combination when the symbols are stopped in response to the operation of the stop button by The present invention can be applied to a slot machine in which one or more of regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, and CZ (hereinafter referred to as bonus) are installed.

The program and data for realizing the present invention are not limited to the form distributed and provided to a computer device included in the pachinko gaming machine 1 by a removable recording medium, and the computer device or the like in advance. It may be distributed by being installed in the storage device included in. Further, the program and data for implementing the present invention may be distributed by being downloaded from another device on a network connected via a communication line or the like by providing a communication processing unit. It doesn't matter.

The game execution mode is not limited to that executed by mounting a removable recording medium, but can also be executed by temporarily storing the program and data downloaded via a communication line in the internal memory or the like. Alternatively, the hardware resources of other devices may be directly used on the network connected via a communication line. Furthermore, the game may be executed by exchanging data with another computer device or the like via a network.

In this specification, one of the expressions for comparing various ratios such as the execution ratio of the effect (expressions such as “high”, “low”, “different”) is “0%”. May be included. For example, it is also included that one is a ratio of "0%" and the other is a ratio of "100%" or a ratio less than "100%".

(Explanation regarding the characteristic part 076IW)
Next, the characteristic part 076IW will be described. First, a game state in the characteristic unit 076IW will be described. First, the gaming state in the characteristic portion 076IW includes a normal state (low probability/non-KT state) and a KT state (so-called small hit time) that is more likely to be a small hit than the normal state. Furthermore, there are two types of KT states, a first KT state and a second KT state, and in this feature section 076IW, the gaming state is a low probability state and a non-KT state (low probability/non-KT state: normal state). In the case of being controlled, in the case of being controlled to the low probability and the first KT state (low probability/first KT state), and in the case of being controlled to the high probability and the first KT state (high probability/first KT state). In some cases, the probability is high and the second KT state (high probability/second KT state) is controlled.

In the first KT state among the KT states, as will be described later, although a small hit is likely to occur and the special variable winning ball device 17 is likely to be in an open state, the open time of the variable winning ball device 6B on the upstream side is extremely long and the small hit. Even if occurs, there are very few cases where the game balls are won in the special variable winning ball device 17 on the downstream side (for example, about 100 balls per 100 fluctuations). Specifically, in the first KT state, it is controlled to a state in which a small hit is likely to occur and is also controlled to a high base state so that the variable winning ball device 6B is opened for a long time. As will be described later, the second KT state in the KT state has a short opening time of the upstream side variable winning ball device 6B, and when a small hit occurs, the game ball is transferred to the downstream special variable winning ball device 17. Easy to win. Specifically, in the second KT state, it is controlled to a state in which a small hit is likely to occur and is also controlled to a low base state to shorten the opening time of the variable winning ball device 6B.

Also, the KT state is a gaming state in which a small hit is more likely to occur than in the normal state (low probability/non-KT state). Specifically, in the characteristic portion 076IW, the probability that the variable winning ball device 6B will be in the open state at the time of a normal drawing is higher in the KT state than in the normal state. And, while the ratio of small hits is low when the first special symbol changes, the ratio of small hits is high when the second special symbol changes (however, it will be described later. Therefore, the KT state is set to a gaming state in which a small hit is more likely to occur than in the normal state. As a result, in the KT state, a small hit is frequently generated by mainly changing the second special symbol, which is a game state advantageous to the player.

It should be noted that the configuration for setting the KT state in the gaming state in which a small hit is more likely than in the normal state is not limited to this. For example, even in the KT state, the probability that the variable winning ball device 6B is in the open state is the same as that in the normal state (for example, 10% or 100%), but when the second special symbol changes. By configuring the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern to be selected in the KT state to be shorter than in the normal state, the ratio of the number of fluctuations to the constant time in the KT state is higher than in the normal state, and the KT state is changed to the normal state. It may be a game state in which a small hit is more likely to occur.

Further, in the characteristic part 076IW, the time required for the game ball to reach the variable winning ball device 6B after passing through the passage gate 41 is configured to be 0.6 seconds or more. Specifically, it is adjusted by the installation positions of the passage gate 41 and the variable winning ball device 6B, and the group of nails forming the flow path of the game ball. As will be described later in detail, in the characteristic part 076IW, the variable winning ball device 6B can be controlled to be in an open state based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the passage gate 41. In the first KT state described later, the game ball passes. The time from the passage of the gate 41 until the variable winning ball device 6B is controlled to the open state is 0.5 seconds, and the game ball reaches the variable winning ball device 6B after passing through the passage gate 41. Since it is shorter than the required time of 0.6 seconds, when one gaming ball passes through the passage gate 41 in the first KT state, the variable winning ball device 6B is controlled to be in the open state. The game balls can be won as they are in the variable winning ball device 6B.

(Big hit probability, small hit probability)
9-1 and 9-2 are explanatory diagrams for explaining the big hit probability and the small hit probability for each set value. Among these, FIG. 9-1 has shown the big hit probability and the small hit probability when the variable display of a 1st special symbol is performed. In addition, FIG. 9-2 shows a big hit probability and a small hit probability when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed. In this example, it is configured such that it can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values having different degrees of advantage for the player (in this example, different jackpot probabilities), and when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is powered on. It is possible to confirm the current setting value and change the setting value by executing the setting confirmation processing and the setting change processing. Further, as shown in FIGS. 9-1 and 9-2, in this example, a case is shown in which the setting can be changed in six stages of setting values “1” to “6”. In addition, it is not limited to the case where the setting can be changed in 6 steps, and for example, the setting can be changed in 2 to 5 steps or the setting can be changed in 7 or more steps.

First, with reference to FIG. 9-1, the big hit probability and the small hit probability when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed will be described. In the example shown in FIG. 9A, in the non-probable change state (low probability state), the setting value “1” has the lowest jackpot probability “205/65536”, which is the most disadvantageous setting for the player. ing. Then, the jackpot probability becomes higher in the order of the set value “2”, the set value “3”, the set value “4”, and the set value “5”, and the set value “6” is the largest jackpot probability “247/65536”. High, it is the most advantageous setting for the player. Further, in the example shown in FIG. 9-1(B), in the probability variation state (high-probability state), the winning probability of the jackpot is 10 times larger than that in the non-probability variation state (low-probability state). When the value is "1", the jackpot probability is "2050/65536", which is the lowest, which is the most disadvantageous setting for the player. Then, the jackpot probability becomes higher in the order of the set value “2”, the set value “3”, the set value “4”, and the set value “5”, and the set value “6” is the largest jackpot probability “2470/65536”. High, it is the most advantageous setting for the player.

On the other hand, regarding the small hit, as shown in FIGS. The small hit probability is constant at "6298/65536" regardless of whether it is a state) or a probability change state (high probability state). That is, in this example, the determination value for the small hit determination is common regardless of the set value, and is also common to the non-probability variation state and the probability variation state. Even when the big hit probability is made different according to the set value, while the small hit probability is constant, as shown in FIGS. May be configured to be different for the set values "1" to "6" so that the number of determination values for each set value is matched.

Next, with reference to FIG. 9-2, the big hit probability and the small hit probability when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed will be described. In the example shown in FIG. 9-2(A), in the non-probable variation state (low probability state), the setting value "1" is the lowest with the jackpot probability "205/65536", which is the most disadvantageous setting for the player. ing. Then, the jackpot probability becomes higher in the order of the set value “2”, the set value “3”, the set value “4”, and the set value “5”, and the set value “6” is the largest jackpot probability “247/65536”. High, it is the most advantageous setting for the player. Further, in the example shown in FIG. 9-2(B), in the probability variation state (high probability state), the winning probability of the jackpot is 10 times as large as that in the non-probability variation state (low probability state). When the value is "1", the jackpot probability is "2050/65536", which is the lowest, which is the most disadvantageous setting for the player. Then, the jackpot probability becomes higher in the order of the set value “2”, the set value “3”, the set value “4”, and the set value “5”, and the set value “6” is the largest jackpot probability “2470/65536”. High, it is the most advantageous setting for the player.

Further, in this example, unlike the case where the variable display of the first special symbol is executed, as shown in FIG. 9-2, when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, it is not determined as a big hit. If you do, it will be determined as a small hit. Therefore, in this example, when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, as a general rule, there is only a case where it is determined as a big hit or a small hit, and there is no case where it is out. However, in this example, even when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, it may be determined to be a compulsory disengagement described later in a very rare case.

Even when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, the deviation may be determined at a low rate.

In this example, when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed, as shown in FIG. 9A, the determination value corresponding to the deviation is the determination value corresponding to all the set values “1” to “6”. It is included in the value (as shown in FIG. 9-1, there is no set value with which the outlier probability becomes 0). The determination value corresponding to the deviation is different depending on the set value (as shown in FIG. 9A, the deviation probability is different depending on which of the set values “1” to “6” is set. ing).

In addition, not only in the mode shown in this example, when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed, for example, if the outfall probability is 0 (that is, the set value that does not include the determination value corresponding to the outfall) It may be configured to have. For example, at the setting value “6” having the highest advantage (the highest jackpot probability), the outfall probability becomes 0, and the determination value corresponding to the outfall may not be included.

Further, the present invention is not limited to the mode shown in this example, and for example, the small hit probability may be 0 (that is, the judgment value does not include the judgment value corresponding to the small hit). For example, when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed (FIG. 9-1), the small hit probability is uniformly set to 0, and the determination value for the small hit may not be included. Good.

In addition, in FIG. 9-1 (A), (B), when performing the variable display of the first special symbol, the small hit probability in the probability variation state (high probability state) and the non-determination variation state (low probability state) Although the match probability is different and the probability of difference is different, the probability of big hit in the probability change state (high probability state) is higher than that in the non-probability change state (low probability state). May be reduced to match the outlier probabilities. Further, even if the set values are different values, for example, "1" and "2", the big hit probability and the small hit probability may be matched. As a result, in a gaming machine in which the number of stages that can be substantially set is less than 6, or in a gaming machine in which there is no difference in advantage due to the setting changing function, a type of gaming machine having a 6-step setting changing function and a hardware/software configuration The manufacturing cost can be reduced.

(Big hit type determination table)
FIGS. 9-3(A) and 9(B) are explanatory diagrams showing the jackpot type determination table stored in the ROM 101. The jackpot type determination table, when it is determined that the variable display result is a jackpot pattern, the type of jackpot is "2R normal jackpot", "2R certainty variation jackpot", "based on a random number for hit type determination. It is a table referred to in order to determine either "6R regular big hit", "6R certainty big hit", or "10R certainty big hit".

As shown in FIG. 9-3(A), in the characteristic part 076IW, regardless of which of the setting values "1" to "6", the variable display of the first special symbol is executed, 9% probability is determined as "10R probability variation big hit", 56% probability is determined as "6R probability variation jackpot", and 35% probability is determined as "6R normal variation jackpot". Further, as shown in FIG. 9-3(B), in the characteristic part 076IW, regardless of which of the setting values "1" to "6", the variable display of the second special symbol is executed. Has a 10% probability of being determined as a “10R probability variation jackpot”, a 50% probability of being determined as a “6R probability variation jackpot”, a 5% probability of being determined as a “2R probability variation jackpot”, and a 35% probability of being determined as “ 2R normal big hit” is decided.

The "10R probability variation big hit" is a big hit that is controlled to a big hit game state of 16 rounds and is shifted to a high-probability state after the end of the big hit game state. Further, the "6R probability variable big hit" is a big hit that is controlled to a big round gaming state of 6 rounds, and is shifted to a high probability state after the end of the big winning gaming state. Further, the "2R probability variation big hit" is a big hit which is controlled to a big hit game state of two rounds and is shifted to a high probability state after the end of the big hit game state.

The "6R normal big hit" is a big hit that is controlled to a big round gaming state for 6 rounds and is shifted to a low probability state after the big hit gaming state ends. Further, the "2R normal big hit" is a big hit which is controlled to a big hit game state of two rounds and is controlled to a low probability state after the end of the big hit game state.

In this characteristic part 076IW, when the "10R certainty variation big hit", "6R certainty variation big hit", and "6R regular big hit", a predetermined period (30 seconds in this example) passes in each round of the big hit game. The special winning opening is controlled to be open until a certain number (10 in this example) of game balls are won, and it is possible to win a maximum of 10 winning openings in each round. On the other hand, in the case of "2R probability variable big hit" and "2R normal big hit", the big winning opening is controlled to be in an open state only for a short period (1.8 seconds in this example) in each round of the big hit game. The number of prizes that can be won in each round is about two to three.

In addition, in this characteristic part 076IW, when the big hit game is finished, it is controlled to either the first KT state, the second KT state or the non-KT state according to the game state before the big hit game and the big hit type, How to transition the game state after the big hit game will be described later (see FIG. 9-22).

Further, in the present example, in the normal symbol process process (step S26), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the variable display result of the normal symbol is a hit (per ordinary symbol), and the normal symbol is determined based on the determination result. The control for executing the variable display is performed. In this example, 99/100 is uniformly applied regardless of whether the state is the probable variation state, the KT state, or the high base state. With the probability of, it is decided to be a normal symbol. Further, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the high base flag indicating the high base state is set, and if the high base flag is set (in the high base state), the variable winning ball device 6B. Is controlled to the open state for a long period of 5.5 seconds, and if the high base flag is not set (low base state), the variable winning ball device 6B is opened for a short period of 0.2 seconds. Control.

(Variation pattern table)
9-4 to 9-6 are explanatory views showing the variation patterns (variation time) of the special symbols and the decorative symbols used in the characteristic part 076IW. EXT shown in FIGS. 9-4 to 9-6 is the second byte data of the effect control command (2-byte configuration) corresponding to each variation pattern.

In the example shown in FIGS. 9-4 to 9-6, nine types of first variation patterns #01 to #09 for the first special symbol and the decorative symbol, and a second variation pattern for the second special symbol and the decorative symbol. 21 types of #01 to #21 are used. Hereinafter, for example, the variation pattern #n (n=01 to 09 or 01 to 21) means both the first variation pattern #n and the second variation pattern #n.

When performing the variable display of the first special symbol, in the non-KT state (low probability/non-KT state), the variation pattern for the first special symbol for non-KT time shown in FIG. 9-4(A) The table is selected and the variation pattern is determined. As shown in FIG. 9-4(A), when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed in the non-KT state, it is determined to be one of the first variation patterns #01 to #06.

When the variable display of the first special symbol is executed, in the KT state (low probability/first KT state, high probability/first KT state, high probability/second KT state), in FIG. 9-4(B) The variation pattern table for the first special symbol for KT shown is selected and the variation pattern is determined. As shown in FIG. 9-4(B), when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed in the KT state, one of the first variation patterns #07 to #09 is determined.

When performing the variable display of the second special symbol, in the non-KT state (low probability/non-KT state), the variation pattern for the second special symbol for non-KT time shown in FIG. 9-5(C) The table is selected and the variation pattern is determined. As shown in FIG. 9-5(C), when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed in the non-KT state, it is determined to be one of the second variation patterns #01 to #02. Specifically, when it is determined to be a small hit, the second variation pattern #01 is determined, and the variation display of the second special symbol is executed for a long period of 15 minutes. Also, when it is determined to be a big hit, the second variation pattern #02 is determined, and the variation display of the second special symbol is executed for a certain long period of 5 minutes.

In this characteristic part 076IW, when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed even in the non-KT state and a small hit occurs, a situation can be expected in which a certain amount of prize balls can be expected due to the winning of the game ball into the special winning opening. Will end up. Therefore, in the characteristic portion 076IW, as shown in FIG. 9-5(C), even if the variable display of the second special symbol is executed during the non-KT state, the variable time is extremely lengthened and the frequency of execution of the variable display is increased. The number of small hits is reduced to reduce the occurrence frequency of the small hits, thereby preventing a situation in which the small hits are aimed at to obtain a prize ball even in the non-KT state. In the characteristic part 076IW, the “frequent occurrence of small hits” is, for example, the occurrence rate of small hits per unit time (for example, 1 minute), and in the KT state, for example, small hits per unit time. Is higher than in the normal state.

In addition, in this characteristic part 076IW, as shown in FIG. 9-5(C), when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed in the non-KT state, the variable time is changed even in the case of a big hit. By relatively lengthening to 5 minutes, it is possible to prevent the act of unreasonably aiming at a prize ball due to winning in the special winning opening during the non-KT state. However, in the case of a big hit, it is not necessary to lengthen the first reserved memory in comparison with the case of a small hit. There is.

When executing the variable display of the second special symbol, in the case of low probability/first KT state, the big hit game based on 6R normal big hit or 2R normal big hit that triggered the low probability/first KT state is ended. A fluctuation pattern table is selected according to the number of fluctuations since then. In this case, if the variation display of the first variation is executed, the low probability/first KT shown in FIG. 9-5(D) and the second special symbol variation pattern table for the first variation are selected and varied. The pattern is determined. As shown in FIG. 9-5(D), when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed as the first variation of the low probability/first KT state, one of the second variation patterns #03 to #04. Will be decided.

As shown in FIG. 9-5(D), when a small hit is determined as the first change of the low probability/first KT state, the small hit has a relatively long change time of 7 seconds. 2 variation pattern #03 (variation pattern for preparation for opening the second starting winning opening) is determined. As described above, in the characteristic part 076IW, when the first KT state is controlled, the frequency of small hits increases, but the variable winning ball device 6B is actually opened to increase the special variable winning amount. The special winning opening in the ball device 17 is set so as to rarely win a prize. However, in a state immediately after shifting to the low probability/first KT state, there is a possibility that a certain amount of game balls are accumulated on the bottom member of the variable winning ball device 6B or the special variable winning ball device 17, and the special variable winning ball is immediately generated. If the device 17 is controlled to be in the open state, a considerable number of game balls may win the special winning opening. Therefore, in the characteristic part 076IW, in the first variation of the first KT state, by securing a variation time of at least 7 seconds, the variable winning ball device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 17 can be operated before shifting to the first KT state. By controlling the special variable winning ball device 17 to the open state after a sufficient time has passed until all the game balls accumulated on the bottom member are allowed to enter the special winning opening, This prevents a situation in which a prize ball more than expected is obtained in the 1KT state. In addition, when it is determined as a big hit as the first variation of the low probability/first KT state, the second variation pattern #04 is determined, and the variation display of the second special symbol is executed for 2 minutes.

Further, in the case of executing the variable display of 2 to 49 fluctuations after finishing the big hit game based on the 6R normal big hit or the 2R normal big hit which triggered the low probability/first KT state, in the case of FIG. 9-5 ( The low probability/first KT time shown in E) and the second special symbol fluctuation pattern table for the 2nd to 49th fluctuations are selected and the fluctuation pattern is determined. As shown in FIG. 9-5(E), when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed as the 2-49th variation of the low probability/first KT state, the second variation patterns #05 to #08 are displayed. It is decided to either. In addition, as shown in FIG. 9-5(E), when it is determined that the small hit is the second to 49th fluctuations of the low probability/first KT state, the second fluctuation pattern of the shortened fluctuation whose fluctuation time is as short as 5 seconds. In some cases, #05 or the second fluctuation pattern #06 of a shortened fluctuation in which the fluctuation time is as short as 1 second may be determined. On the other hand, when it is determined as the small hit as the 2-49th variation of the low probability/first KT state, the second variation pattern #07 with reach may be determined. The second variation pattern #05 is a variation pattern that can be selected only when the second pending storage is not stored, and the second variation pattern #06 can be selected only when one or more second pending storages are stored. It is a fluctuation pattern. As a result, the pending storage is quickly consumed and the operating rate is increased. Further, when it is determined as a big hit as the 2-49th variation of the low probability/first KT state, the second variation pattern #08 with reach is determined.

Also, after the big hit game based on the 6R normal big hit or the 2R normal big hit that triggered the low probability/first KT state, the 50th fluctuation display (that is, the low probability/final change in the first KT state) is executed. If yes, the low probability/first KT time and the 50th variation second special symbol variation pattern table shown in FIG. 9-5(F) are selected, and the variation pattern is determined. As shown in FIG. 9-5(F), when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed as the 50th variation of the low probability/first KT state, one of the second variation patterns #09 to #10 Will be decided.

In the characteristic portion 076IW, when the low probability/first KT state is controlled, for example, a character display such as “during chance time” is displayed on the image display device 5. As shown in FIG. 9-5(F), when it is determined that a small hit is the 50th variation of the low probability/first KT state, a character display such as "end of chance time!!" is displayed on the image display device 5. The second variation pattern #09 accompanied by the end display is determined. Further, as shown in FIG. 9-5(F), when it is determined that the 50th variation of the low probability/first KT state is a big hit, a character display such as “end of chance time!!” is displayed on the image display device 5. The second variation pattern #10 with a predetermined revival display after the end display to be performed is determined.

In addition, in this characteristic part 076IW, as shown in FIG. 9-4, when it is a big hit in the variable display of the first special symbol during the KT state, the first variation pattern #09 having a variation time of 10 seconds is set. Is configured to determine. This is a case where a big hit occurs immediately in the change display of the first special symbol immediately after the transition to the second KT state, and if the change time of the big hit change of the first special symbol is set to a long change time, Since the variation of the second special symbol executed during the big hit variation of the first special symbol is configured to be a forced outfall, the forced outfall frequently occurs even though the second KT state and the player is a small hit. You will not be able to receive any profit from. Therefore, in this characteristic part 076IW, by changing the variation time of the big hit variation of the first special symbol to a short variation time, the big hit game state based on the variation of the first special symbol is generated before the frequent forced deviation occurs. It is configured.

Note that, unlike the feature part 076IW, even when the variation of the second special symbol is started during the big hit variation of the first special symbol, the variation of the second special symbol is not forced to fall off (for example, the first Special symbol big hit symbol When the second special symbol is changing at the time of stop, if the gaming machine of the second special symbol is forced out), the variation time of the first special symbol big hit in the KT state May be a long fluctuation time (for example, 1 minute). This is a case where a big hit occurs immediately in the change display of the first special symbol immediately after the transition to the second KT state, and if the change time of the big hit is the same short change time as the deviation, the player You will not be able to receive any profit from the small hit. Therefore, if the variation time of the big hit of the first special symbol in the KT state is a long variation time (for example, 1 minute), even in such a case, a sufficient time that at least a plurality of small hits can occur. (For example, 1 minute) is ensured.

When executing the variation display of the second special symbol, if it is in the high probability / first KT state, the variation after finishing the jackpot game based on the 6R certainty variation jackpot that triggered the high probability / first KT state The variation pattern table is selected according to the number of times. In this case, if the variation display of the first variation is executed, the high probability/first KT shown in FIG. 9-6(G) and the second special symbol variation pattern table for the first variation are selected and varied. The pattern is determined. As shown in FIG. 9-6(G), when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed as the first variation of the high probability/first KT state, one of the second variation patterns #11 to #13 Will be decided.

As in the case of the first change of the low probability/first KT state, as shown in FIG. 9-6(G), when the small hit is determined as the first change of the high probability/first KT state, In some cases, it may be determined as a variation pattern (second variation pattern #11) for preparation for opening the winning opening for winning. On the other hand, when it is determined that the first variation of the high probability/first KT state is the small hit, the second variation pattern #12 with reach may be determined. Further, as shown in FIG. 9-6(G), when it is determined that the big variation is the first variation of the high probability/first KT state, the second variation pattern #13 with reach is determined.

Further, if the variation display after the second variation is executed after the jackpot game based on the 6R certainty variation jackpot that has triggered the high probability/first KT state, if the variation display after the second variation is executed, the high rate shown in FIG. The probability/first KT time and the second special symbol variation pattern table for the second variation and thereafter is selected and the variation pattern is determined. As shown in FIG. 9-6(H), when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed as the second variation after the high probability/first KT state, any of the second variation patterns #14 to #17. Will be decided.

Note that, as in the case of the low probability/second variation 49 of the first KT state, as shown in FIG. 9-6(H), when it is determined as the small hit after the second variation of the high probability/first KT state, In some cases, the second variation pattern #14 with a shortened variation of which the variation time is as short as 5 seconds and the second variation pattern #15 with a shortened variation of which the variation time is as short as 1 second may be determined. On the other hand, when it is determined as the small hit after the second variation of the high probability/first KT state, the second variation pattern #16 with reach may be determined. The second variation pattern #14 is a variation pattern that can be selected only when the second pending storage is not stored, and the second variation pattern #15 can be selected only when one or more second pending storages are stored. It is a fluctuation pattern. As a result, the pending storage is quickly consumed and the operating rate is increased. Further, when it is determined that the big hit is the second variation after the high probability/first KT state, the second variation pattern #17 with reach is determined.

When performing the variable display of the second special symbol, when the high probability / second KT state, the high probability / second KT variation pattern table for the second high probability shown in FIG. 9-6 (I) The variation pattern is selected and determined. As shown in FIG. 9-6(I), when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed in the high probability/second KT state, it is determined to be one of the second variation patterns #18 to #21. ..

In addition, as shown in FIG. 9-6(I), when it is determined that the small hit in the high probability/second KT state, the second variation pattern #18 of the short variation of the variation time of 1.5 seconds is determined. In some cases, the second fluctuation pattern #19, which is a normal fluctuation having a fluctuation time of 5 seconds, may be determined. On the other hand, when it is determined as a small hit in the high-probability/second KT state, the variation time may be determined to be the second variation pattern #20 involving a long battle time of 2 minutes and a battle effect. In addition, when it is determined that the big hit in the high probability/second KT state, the variation time is set to 2 minutes and the second variation pattern #21 accompanied by the battle effect is determined.

Next, the opening patterns of the variable winning ball device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 17 in the KT state will be described. FIG. 9-7 is an explanatory diagram for explaining an opening pattern of the variable winning ball device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 17 in the KT state. 9-7(1) shows an opening pattern of the variable winning ball device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 17 in the first KT state, and FIG. 9-7(2) shows the variable winning ball device in the second KT state. 6B and the opening pattern of the special variable winning ball device 17 are shown.

First, the opening patterns of the variable winning ball apparatus 6B and the special variable winning ball apparatus 17 in the first KT state will be described with reference to FIG. 9-7(1). As shown in FIG. 9-7(1), when the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 and the game ball is detected by the gate switch 21, the variable display of the normal symbol is executed on the normal symbol display device 20, When it is determined to be a normal symbol, the hit symbol is derived and displayed on the normal symbol display device 20, and when it is determined to be out, the offset symbol is derived and displayed on the normal symbol display device 20. In this characteristic part 076IW, as shown in FIG. 9-7(1), the variation time of the normal symbol is 0.2 seconds, and the symbol confirmation time for deriving and displaying the winning symbol or the deviating symbol is 0.2 seconds. ing. When the winning symbol is derived and displayed, as shown in FIG. 9-7(1), after the symbol confirmation time of 0.2 seconds has elapsed, the second start winning opening opening pre-processing time of 0.1 seconds is set. After the lapse of time, the variable winning ball device 6B is opened for 5.5 seconds, and the game ball can be won in the second starting winning port.

When the game ball is won in the second start winning hole when the variable winning ball device 6B is in the open state, the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, and when it is determined to be a small hit, The small hitting symbol is derived and displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B. Then, when the small hit symbol is derived and displayed, as shown in FIG. 9-7(1), the special variable winning ball device 17 is opened for 0.8 seconds, and the game ball is won in the special winning opening. It becomes possible. However, in the first KT state, as shown in FIG. 9-7(1), the opening time of the downstream special variable winning ball device 17 is as short as 0.8 seconds, whereas the upstream variable winning ball device 17 is short. 6B has a long opening time of 5.5 seconds. Therefore, in the first KT state, although a small hit is likely to occur, it is extremely rare that a game ball is won in the special winning opening (for example, about 1 ball for every 100 variable displays).

In the first KT state, as shown in FIG. 9-7(1), after the opening of the variable winning ball device 6B is finished, the opening of the next variable winning ball device 6B can be performed in the following ordinary pattern. It is after elapse of at least 0.5 seconds which is a total of the variation time of 0.2 seconds, the symbol determination time of 0.2 seconds and the second starting winning opening opening pre-processing time of 0.1 seconds. Therefore, in the characteristic portion 076IW, in the first KT state, a closing period of at least 0.5 seconds is provided as an interval period after the variable winning ball device 6B is opened.

Further, in the characteristic portion 076IW, in the first KT state, after the game ball has passed through the passage gate 41 in a state where the normal symbol is not changed, the variable winning ball device 6B is controlled to be in an open state. Usually after 0.5 seconds which is the total of the variation time of the symbol 0.2 seconds, the symbol confirmation time 0.2 seconds and the second starting winning opening opening pretreatment time 0.1 seconds, the game ball is The time required from passing through the passage gate 41 to reaching the variable winning ball apparatus 6B is about 0.6 seconds. In this way, in the first KT state, the time from when the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 to when the variable winning ball device 6B is controlled to be in an open state in a state where the normal symbol is not changed, Normally, the variable winning ball device 6B is already opened because it is shorter than the time it takes for the gaming ball to reach the variable winning ball device 6B after the gaming ball passes through the passing gate 41 in a state where the symbols are not changed. The game ball reaches the variable winning ball device 6B while being controlled to the state. Therefore, in the first KT state, the game balls that have passed through the passage gate 41 in a state where the normal symbols are not changed are easy to win in the variable winning ball device 6B.

Next, the opening patterns of the variable winning ball apparatus 6B and the special variable winning ball apparatus 17 in the second KT state will be described with reference to FIG. 9-7(2). As shown in FIG. 9-7(2), when the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 and the game ball is detected by the gate switch 21, the normal symbol display 20 executes the variable display of the normal symbol, When it is determined to be a normal symbol, the hit symbol is derived and displayed on the normal symbol display device 20, and when it is determined to be out, the offset symbol is derived and displayed on the normal symbol display device 20. In this characteristic part 076IW, as shown in FIG. 9-7(2), the variation time of the normal symbol is set to 1.0 second, and the symbol determination time for deriving and displaying the hit symbol or the off symbol is 0.2 second. ing. When the winning symbol is derived and displayed, as shown in FIG. 9-7(2), after the symbol fixing time of 0.2 seconds has elapsed, the second starting winning opening opening process time of 2.6 seconds is set. After a lapse of time, the variable winning ball device 6B is opened for 0.2 seconds, and the game ball can be won in the second starting winning port.

When the game ball is won in the second start winning hole when the variable winning ball device 6B is in the open state, the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, and when it is determined to be a small hit, The small hitting symbol is derived and displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B. Then, when the small hit symbol is derived and displayed, as shown in FIG. 9-7(2), the special variable winning ball device 17 is opened for 0.8 seconds, and the game ball is won in the special winning opening. It will be possible.

In the second KT state, unlike the first KT state, the opening time of the variable winning ball device 6B is extremely short at 0.2 seconds. Further, in this characteristic part 076IW, in the second KT state, at least 3.8 seconds as an interval period (closing period) after the variable winning ball device 6B is opened (variation time of normal symbol 1.0 seconds + symbol determination time 0). A relatively long period of 0.2 seconds+second start winning opening opening pre-processing 2.6 seconds) is secured. Therefore, in the second KT state, as shown in FIG. 9-7(2), the open time of the upstream variable winning ball apparatus 6B is short and the interval period (closed period) is long. The game ball easily enters the special variable winning ball device 17 on the downstream side, and the game ball easily enters the special winning opening.

In the second KT state, since a game ball can easily enter the special winning opening and a prize ball is easily obtained, this example is also called "small hit RUSH". In the second KT state, "small hit RUSH" Characters such as “” are displayed.

Further, in the present characteristic portion 076IW, in the second KT state, after the game ball has passed through the passage gate 41 in a state where the normal symbol is not changed, the variable winning ball device 6B is controlled to be in an open state. It is after the total of 3.8 seconds which is the total of the variation time of the normal symbol of 1.0 second, the symbol fixing time of 0.2 seconds and the second starting winning opening opening pre-processing time of 2.6 seconds, and the game ball is The time required to reach the variable winning ball apparatus 6B after passing through the passage gate 41 is configured to be about 0.6 seconds. In this way, in the second KT state, the time from when the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 to when the variable winning ball device 6B is controlled to be in an open state in a state where the normal symbol is not changed, Normally, the variable winning ball device 6B is in an open state because it is longer than the time it takes for the gaming ball to reach the variable winning ball device 6B after the gaming ball passes through the passage gate 41 in a state where the symbols are not changed. The game ball reaches the variable winning ball device 6B before being controlled to. Therefore, in the second KT state, the game balls that have passed through the passage gate 41 in a state where the normal symbols are not changed are difficult to win in the variable winning ball device 6B.

In addition, in the characteristic part 076IW, the process of executing the variable display of the normal symbols and controlling the opening of the variable winning ball device 6B is a normal symbol process process by the game controlling microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103). This is performed by executing (see step S26). Further, the game control microcomputer 100, in the normal symbol process process of step S26, whether the game state is a probability change state (high probability state), whether in the non-KT state, the first KT state or the second KT state. Regardless of whether there is a big hit game state or not, the same probability (for example, 99/100) is used to determine whether or not the common figure is hit.

In the characteristic part 076IW, in the first KT state and the second KT state, the variation time of the normal symbol and the symbol determination time are the same at 0.2 seconds each, and the second start winning opening opening pre-processing time is the second. A case has been shown in which the closing period (interval period) of the variable winning ball apparatus 6B is made different by shortening it to 0.1 seconds in the 1KT state and lengthening it to 2.6 seconds in the second KT state. I can't. For example, the closing period (interval period) of the variable winning ball apparatus 6B may be different by changing the variation time and the symbol determination time between the first KT state and the second KT state. Further, for example, the time after the second starting winning opening opening processing after closing the variable winning ball device 6B is configured to be controllable, and if the second starting winning opening opening processing time is different between the first KT state and the second KT state. The variable winning ball apparatus 6B may be configured to have a different closing period (interval period). Particularly, if the closing period (interval period) of the variable winning ball device 6B in the first KT state is shortened by any of the above methods, the winning of the special winning opening in the first KT state can be suppressed. .

As will be described later, in the characteristic unit 076IW, in the first KT state, the high base state is set by setting the high base flag indicating the high base state, and as shown in FIG. 9-7(1). As described above, the variable winning ball apparatus 6B is controlled to be opened for a long time. Further, in the second KT state, the high base flag is not set and the low base state is controlled so that the opening time of the variable winning ball device 6B is shortened as shown in FIG. 9-7(2). ing.

Note that, for example, a special flag (open extension flag) indicating that the opening time of the variable winning ball device 6B is extended is provided, and if the special flag is set, as shown in FIG. 9-7(1). The variable winning ball device 6B is controlled by the first opening pattern (long opening) that opens for a long time, and if the special flag is not set, the variable winning ball device 6B shown in FIG. 9-7(2) is opened for a short time. You may comprise so that it may control by a 2 opening pattern (short opening). That is, the special flag may be set only in the first KT state, and the special flag may be set not to be set in other states including the big hit game state.

Further, even in the first KT state, the opening time of the variable winning ball device 6B may be shortened when the low-probability/last variation display in the first KT state is executed. For example, in the shortened variation period of the special symbol of 50 times of the low probability/first KT state, the above-mentioned special flag may be erased in response to the 49th variation stop of the special symbol. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable with the long open of the variable winning ball device 6B when performing the left-handed notification after the end of the low probability/first KT state. be able to.

As described above, in the case of configuring the variable winning ball device 6B using the opening control flag (special flag) of the variable winning ball device 6B, a flag for shortening fluctuation of the variable display of the special symbol is further used. The variable display of the special symbol may be controlled in this case, and in this case, the special flag and the flag for shortening variation may be separately managed and controlled.

Further, the variable winning ball device 6B may be configured to be short-circuited open during the low probability/non-KT state. With such a configuration, when the probability of opening the variable winning ball device 6B is high in the low probability/non-KT state (left hit state), only a few game balls are operated to be fired. Thus, it is possible to prevent the variable winning ball device 6B from winning, and it is possible to prevent the right hitting operation from being performed during the low probability/non-KT state.

In addition, in this characteristic part 076IW, as shown in FIG. 9-7, the variation time of the normal symbol is set to a short time of 0.2 seconds. This is, for example, in the case where the variable display of the second special symbol having a relatively long variation time is executed in the first KT state, the variable winning ball is in a state in which the normal symbol is in a variation stop and the normal symbol is not stored. This is because the device 6B is in a closed state, and it is possible to capture with the aim of the variation stop timing of the second special symbol (in the case of a small hit, if the variation time of the normal symbol is long, the passage gate). The variable winning ball device 6B does not open by the time the game ball that has passed through 41 reaches the variable winning ball device 6B or the special variable winning ball device 17, and the special winning opening can be won. On the other hand, in this characteristic portion 076IW, by shortening the variation time of the normal symbol, the variable winning ball device 6B is opened before the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 and before reaching the variable winning ball device 6B. Since it is set to be started, it is possible to eliminate the capture element by the firing operation aiming at the small hit occurrence timing based on the variable display of the second special symbol in the first KT state.

(Direction control command)
9-8 and 9-9 are explanatory diagrams showing an example of the content of the effect control command sent to the effect control CPU 120. In the example shown in FIG. 9-8, commands 8000(H) to 8009(H) and 8011(H) to 8025(H) are decorations variably displayed on the image display device 5 in correspondence with the variable display of special symbols. It is a production control command (variation pattern command) for designating a variation pattern of a symbol. The effect control command for designating the variation pattern is also a command for designating the variation start. Therefore, when the effect control CPU 120 receives any of the commands 8000(H) to 8009(H) and 8011(H) to 8025(H), the variable display of the decorative symbol is started on the image display device 5. Control.

The command 9001 (H) is a production control command (display result 1 designation command) (deletion designation command) that designates that the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern designated by the variation pattern command is designated as a margin. Command 9002 (H) is a production control command (display result 2 designation command (10R probability variation big hit designation command)) which designates that the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern designated by the variation pattern command is 10R probability variation big hit. . Command 9003 (H) is a production control command (display result 3 designation command (6R probability variation big hit designation command)) that designates that the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern designated by the variation pattern command is 6R probability variation big hit. .. Command 9004 (H) is a production control command (display result 4 designation command (6R normal jackpot designation command)) that designates that the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern designated by the variation pattern command is 6R normal jackpot. .. Command 9005 (H) is a production control command (display result 5 designation command (2R probability variation big hit designation command)) that designates that the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern designated by the variation pattern command is 2R probability variation big hit. .. Command 9006 (H) is a production control command (display result 6 designation command (2R normal jackpot designation command)) that designates that the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern designated by the variation pattern command is 2R normal jackpot. .. The command 9007 (H) is a production control command (display result 7 designation command (small hit designation command)) that designates that the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern designated by the variation pattern command is a small hit.

Hereinafter, the display result 1 designation command to the display result 7 designation command may be referred to as a display result designation command. In this characteristic unit 076IW, since the game control microcomputer 100 transmits the display result designation command immediately before the variation pattern command, the display control instruction command received by the production control CPU 120 immediately before the first variation pattern command is It can be determined that it is a display result designation command for the first special symbol, and the display result designation command received immediately before the second variation pattern command can be determined to be a display result designation command for the second special symbol, so the display result Although the designation command can be combined for the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the display result designation command for the first special symbol and the display result designation command for the second special symbol may be different.

In addition, the game control microcomputer 100 does not send a display result designation command, but responds to each of 10R probability variation big hit, 6R probability variation big hit, 6R normal big hit, 2R probability variation big hit, 2R normal big hit, small hit, and out. The variation pattern command may be defined, and the effect control CPU 120 may determine the stop symbol of the decorative symbol based on the received variation pattern command.

Command 9C00 (H) is a production control command (right-handed lighting end designation command) that specifies that the right-handed indicator 26 has finished lighting. Command 9C01 (H) is a production control command (right-handed lighting start designation command) that specifies that the right-handed indicator 26 has started lighting.

Command A000 (H) is a production control command (first symbol confirmation designation command) that can specify the stop of the variable display of the first special symbol. Command A001 (H) is a production control command (second symbol confirmation designation command) that can specify the stop of the variable display of the second special symbol.

Command A002 (H) is a production control command (first compulsory symbol confirmation designation command) that can specify to forcibly stop the variable display of the first special symbol. Command A003 (H) is a production control command (second forced symbol confirmation designation command) that can specify that the variable display of the second special symbol is forcibly stopped.

Command BXXX (H) (X = arbitrary hexadecimal number) is a production control command sent from the start of the big hit game to the end of the big hit game. Among them, B000 (H) is a production control command (big hit start designation command: fanfare designating command) that designates the start of a big hit game. B001 (H) is a production control command (big hit end designation command: ending designation command) for designating the end of the big hit game. B004 (H) is an effect control command (small hit start designation command) for designating the start of the small hit game. B005 (H) is an effect control command (small hit end designation command) that specifies the end of the small hit game.

The command B1XX(H) is a production control command (a special winning opening open display command) that specifies the display during the round during the big hit game. The number of rounds displayed in "XX" is set. The command B2XX(H) is an effect control command (display command after opening the special winning opening) that specifies the display after the round during the big hit game (display of the interval between the rounds).

The command B400 (H) is an effect control command (a special winning opening winning designation command) that specifies that the game ball has won the big winning opening. Command B401 (H) is an effect control command (special winning a prize winning designation command) that specifies that a game ball has won a special winning opening.

The command C000 (H) is an effect control command (first effective start winning award designation command) indicating that the game ball has won the first starting winning opening in a state where the first reserved memory number has not reached 4. The command C001 (H) is an effect control command (second effective start winning award designation command) indicating that the game ball has won in the second starting winning opening in a state where the second reserved memory number has not reached 4. It should be noted that a command indicating the first reserved memory number may be transmitted as the first effective start winning combination designation command, and a command indicating the second reserved memory number may be transmitted as the second effective start winning combination designation command. Then, the first effective start winning award designating command and the second effective starting award winning designating command are commands indicating that there is a starting winning.

The command C4XX(H) and the command C6XX(H) are effect control commands (winning-time determination result designating command) indicating the contents of the winning-time determination result at the time of starting winning. Of these, the command C4XX (H) is a production control command (symbol design command) that indicates the result of determination of whether or not it is a big hit, whether or not it is a small hit, and the type of big hit among the determination results at the time of winning. is there. Further, the command C6XX(H) is an effect control command (fluctuation category command) that indicates the variation result of the variation determination result of the winning determination result.

Command C801 (H) is a production control command (gate passage designation command) that designates that the game ball has passed through the passage gate 41.

Command D000 (H) is a production control command (first customer) that specifies that it is in the first customer waiting state (the state in which the first special symbol is not changed and the first reserved memory is not stored). Waiting demo display designation command). Command D001 (H) is a production control command (second customer) that specifies that it is in the second customer waiting state (the state in which the second special symbol is not changed and the second hold memory is not stored). Waiting demo display designation command). The first customer waiting demo display designation command may be a command that can be transmitted only in the normal state. Further, the second customer waiting demonstration display designation command may be a command that can be transmitted only in the KT state.

The command E000(H) is an effect control command (low probability/non-KT background designating command) for designating the background display when the game state is the low probability/non-KT state. Command E001 (H) is a production control command (low probability/first KT background designating command) that designates background display when the gaming state is low probability/first KT state. The command E002(H) is a production control command (high accuracy/first KT background designating command) for designating the background display when the gaming state is the high probability/first KT state. The command E003 (H) is a production control command (high-accuracy/second KT background designation command) for designating the background display when the gaming state is the high probability/second KT state.

Command E1XX (H) is a production control command (setting value command) that specifies the setting value that is currently set. The set value is set to "XX". For example, when the set value is set to "1", the command E101(H) is transmitted as the set value command. Further, for example, when the set value is set to "6", the command E106(H) is transmitted as the set value command.

When the effect control CPU 120 (specifically, the effect control CPU 120) mounted on the effect control board 12 receives the effect control command described above from the game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11, 9-8 and the display state of the image display device 5 is changed according to the contents shown in FIG. 9-9, the display state of the lamp is changed, and the sound number data is output to the voice control board 13. Note that production control commands other than the production control commands shown in FIGS. 9-8 and 9-9 are also transmitted from the main board 11 to the production control board 12. For example, more detailed effect control commands related to the big hit game and effect control commands indicating the game state (for example, effect control commands indicating initialization commands) are also transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12.

(Starting winning determination process)
FIG. 9-10 is a flowchart showing the start winning determination process. Of these, FIG. 9-10(A) shows a flowchart of the first start winning determination process (step S101A) executed in the first special symbol process process (step S25A). Further, FIG. 9-10(B) shows a flowchart of the second start winning a prize determination process executed in the second special symbol process process (step S25B).

First, the first start prize-winning determination process will be described with reference to FIG. In the first start prize determination process, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) first confirms whether or not the first start opening switch 22A is in the ON state (step 076IWS1211A). If the first starting opening switch 22A is not in the on state, the processing is ended as it is. If the first starting opening switch 22A is in the ON state, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the first reserved storage number has reached the upper limit value (specifically, the first reserved storage for counting the first reserved storage number). It is confirmed whether or not the value of the number counter is 4 (step 076IWS1212A). If the first number of reserved storages has reached the upper limit value, the processing is ended as it is.

If the first reserved storage number has not reached the upper limit value, the CPU 103 increments the value of the first reserved storage number counter by 1 (step 076IWS1213A). Next, the CPU 103 extracts a value from a counter for generating each random number such as a random number for determining a hit, a random number for determining a hit type, a random number for determining a variation pattern, and stores them in a storage area in the first pending storage buffer. Processing is performed (step 076IWS1214A). Note that a storage area corresponding to the upper limit value (4 in this example) of the first reserved storage number is secured in the first reserved storage buffer and is formed in the RAM 102.

Next, the CPU 103 executes a winning determination process for previously determining a variation display result and a variation pattern when the variation based on the detected starting winning is subsequently performed (step 076IWS1215A). Then, the CPU 103 controls to transmit the symbol designating command to the effect control CPU 120 based on the determination result of the winning determination process (step 076IWS1216A), and also controls to transmit the variation category command to the effect control CPU 120 ( Step 076IWS1217A). In addition, the CPU 103 controls to transmit the first effective start winning designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 076IWS1218A).

Next, the second start winning determination process will be described with reference to FIG. 9-10(B). In the second start winning determination process, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) first confirms whether or not the second start opening switch 22B is in the ON state (step 076IWS1211B). If the second starting opening switch 22B is not in the ON state, the processing is ended as it is. If the second starting opening switch 22B is in the ON state, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the second reserved storage number has reached the upper limit value (specifically, the second reserved storage for counting the second reserved storage number). It is confirmed whether or not the value of the number counter is 4 (step 076IWS1212B). If the second number of reserved storages has reached the upper limit value, the processing is ended as it is.

If the second reserved storage number has not reached the upper limit value, the CPU 103 increments the value of the second reserved storage number counter by 1 (step 076IWS1213B). Next, the CPU 103 extracts a value from a counter for generating each random number such as a hit determination random number, a hit type determination random number, and a variation pattern determination random number, and stores them in a storage area in the second pending storage buffer. Processing is performed (step 076IWS1214B). Note that a storage area corresponding to the upper limit value (4 in this example) of the second reserved storage number is secured in the second reserved storage buffer and is formed in the RAM 102.

Next, the CPU 103 executes a winning determination process (step 076IWS1215B). Then, the CPU 103 controls to transmit the symbol designating command to the effect control CPU 120 based on the determination result of the winning determination process (step 076IWS1216B), and also controls to transmit the variation category command to the effect control CPU 120 ( Step 076IWS1217B). In addition, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit the first effective start winning designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 076IWS1218B).

(First special symbol normal processing)
9-11 is a flowchart showing a first special symbol normal process (step S110A) in the first special symbol process process. The state where the first special symbol normal process is executed is a case where the value of the first special symbol process flag is the value indicating step S110A. The case where the value of the first special symbol process flag is a value indicating step S110A is a state in which the variable display of the first special symbol is not performed on the first special symbol display device 4A.

In the first special symbol normal processing, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103), first, the value of the accessory control process flag is a value indicating the accessory control normal processing (step S120). It is confirmed whether or not (step 076IWS50A). The case where the value of the accessory control process flag is the value indicating the accessory control normal process (step S120), that is, the value of the accessory control process flag is the gate passage waiting process (step S121) to small hit. It is a case where the value does not indicate the ending process (step S128), and it is neither during the big hit game (the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened a predetermined number of times) nor during the small hit game (the special variable winning ball device 17 is opened). is there.

If the value of the accessory control process flag is a value indicating the accessory control normal processing (step S120), the game control microcomputer 100 confirms the value of the first reserved memory number (step 076IWS51A). Specifically, the count value of the first reserved storage number counter is confirmed. If the number of first reserved memories is 0, the first customer waiting demonstration display designation command is transmitted to the effect control CPU 120 (step 076IWS52A).

If the first reserved memory number is not 0, the game control microcomputer 100 reads each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the reserved memory number=1 in the first reserved memory buffer of the RAM 102 to read the RAM 102. The value is stored in the first random number buffer area (step 076IWS53A), the value of the first reserved storage number is decremented by 1 (the count value of the first reserved storage number counter is decremented by 1), and the content of each storage area is shifted. (Step 076 IWS54A). That is, in the first reserved storage buffer of the RAM 102, each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the first reserved storage number=n (n=2, 3, 4) is calculated as the first reserved storage number=n−1. Store in the storage area corresponding to. Therefore, the order in which the random number values stored in the respective storage areas corresponding to the respective first reserved storage numbers are always the same as the order of the first reserved storage numbers=1, 2, 3, 4. It is like this. That is, in this example, the content of each storage area is shifted each time the variable display start condition is satisfied, so that the order in which each random value is extracted can be specified. In this example, the random number values stored in the respective storage areas corresponding to the first reserved storage number and the random number values stored in the respective storage areas corresponding to the second reserved storage number are The extraction order is also saved so that it can be specified.

Next, the game control microcomputer 100 performs control to transmit a setting value command indicating the setting value set in the RAM 102 to the effect control board 12 (step 076IWS55A). In this example, the setting value command is transmitted every time the variable display is started by executing the processing of step 076IWS55A. The set value command is also sent when is executed.

The timing for transmitting the set value command is not limited to that shown in this example.For example, the set value command may be transmitted at each end of the variable display, or the set value command may be transmitted during the variable display. It may be configured to do so.

After that, the game control microcomputer 100 transmits a background designation command according to the current game state to the effect control CPU 120 (step 076IWS56A). Specifically, when the probability variation flag and the high base flag are off, it is determined that the probability is low/non-KT state and the low probability/non-KT background designation command is issued, and the probability variation flag is off and the high base flag is on. In some cases, the low probability/first KT state is determined, and the low probability/first KT background designation command is set. When the probability variation flag is on and the high base flag is on, it is high probability/first KT state. If the probability variation flag is on and the high base flag is off, the high probability/second KT background designation command is determined to be the high probability/second KT state, and the high precision/second KT background designation command is determined. Send.

Next, the game control microcomputer 100 determines whether or not the big hit of the second special symbol is changing (step 076IWS57A). Specifically, when the second big hit flag indicating that the big hit is set based on the variable display of the second special symbol is set, it is determined that the big hit of the second special symbol is changing. When it is determined that the big bonus of the second special symbol is changing, the process proceeds to step 076IWS69A without performing the processing after step 076IWS58A. As a result, when the variation of the first special symbol is started during the variation of the big bonus of the second special symbol, it is configured to be forcibly disregarded regardless of whether or not the jackpot determination value is stored.

The method of forcibly disengaging is not limited to the above. For example, when the big hit of the second special symbol is changing in step 076IWS57A, a process of setting a random number value (fixed value) that is out of alignment as a hitting random number is performed, and the process proceeds to step 076IWS59A to make a start winning prize. It may be forcibly disregarded regardless of which random number for hit determination has been acquired.

In addition, for example, when the big hit variation of the second special symbol is in step 076IWS57A, without performing the processing of step 076IWS58A to S63A, a random number value (fixed value) that is a deviation for the hit determination random number is set and set to a small value. By making the hit determination, the hit determination may be forcibly disregarded regardless of which random number for the hit determination was obtained at the time of winning the start prize.

When the big hit of the second special symbol is not changing, the game controlling microcomputer 100 reads the hit judging random number from the first random number storing buffer (step 076IWS58A), and executes the big hit judging module (step 076IWS59A). The big hit determination module is a program that decides to make a big hit if the random number for hit determination matches a predetermined big hit determination value. When it is determined to be a big hit (step 076IWS60A), the game control microcomputer 100 sets the first big hit flag indicating that it is a big hit based on the variable display of the first special symbol (step 076IWS61A). . Then, based on the hit type determination random number, it is determined whether the big hit type is a 10R sure change big hit, a 6R sure change big hit, or a 6R normal big hit (step 076IWS62A), and the big hit type is stored (step 076IWS63A), step 076IWS69A. Move to.

If the big hit is not made in step 076IWS60A, the game control microcomputer 100 executes the small hit determination module (step 076IWS64A). The small hitting determination module is a program that decides to make a small hit if the random number for hitting determination (or a random number for small hitting determination) matches a predetermined small hitting determination value. When it is determined to be a small hit (step 076IWS65A), the game control microcomputer 100 sets the first small hit flag indicating that the small hit will be made based on the variable display of the first special symbol ( Step 076IWS66A). Then, the process proceeds to step 076IWS69A.

Next, the game control microcomputer 100 determines whether or not the value of the high base number counter indicating the remaining number of times of the high base state is "0" (step 076IWS69A), and if it is "0", step 076IWS75A. Move to. If the value of the high base number counter is not "0", that is, if it is in the low probability/first KT state, the game control microcomputer 100 subtracts "1" from the value of the high base number counter (step 076IWS70A), It is determined whether or not it has become "0" (step 076IWS71A). If the value of the high base number counter does not become "0", the process proceeds to step 076IWS75A. When the value of the high base number counter becomes “0”, the game control microcomputer 100 resets the high base flag indicating that it is in the high base state (step 076IWS72A), and shortens the variable display of the special symbol. The special figure time saving flag indicating that control is in progress is reset (step 076IWS73A). In addition, the game control microcomputer 100 sets a lighting extension flag (state extension flag) indicating that the lighting of the right-handed indicator 26 is extended to the end of fluctuation (step 076IWS74A). Then, the process proceeds to step 076IWS75A.

In this characteristic part 076IW, as will be described later, the high base flag is set and the number of executions of the variable display in the high base state is managed with a low probability at the end of the big hit game based on the 6R normal big hit or the 2R normal big hit. / It is a case where it is controlled to a high base state (low probability/first KT state) and variable display is executed 50 times. In the case of the low probability/high base state (low probability/first KT state), when the 50th variation display is started, it is determined as Y in steps 076IWS71A and S71B, and the high base flag is set in steps 076IWS72A and S72B. At the same time as being reset, the special figure time saving flag is also reset in steps 076IWS73A and S73B, and the low probability/low base state (normal state (non-KT state)) is entered.

In addition, the lighting extension flag (state extension flag) is for continuing the right hitting state by continuing the right hitting notification, and as the gaming state, the high base state has ended, but the variation reduction common to the first KT state is shortened. It is a flag for setting the state and making it a production background common to the first KT state.

In this example, the process of step 076IWS74A and the process of step 076IWS74B, which will be described later, are executed to start the variation display of either the variable display of the first special symbol or the variable display of the second special symbol, and thus the high base state. When the final variation (in this example, the 50th variation display) is started, the lighting extension flag (state extension flag) is set and the variation shortened state is extended. In this case, when the lighting extension flag (state extension flag) is set, the variable display of the first special symbol or the variable display of the second special symbol (in this example, the 50th variation display) ends. Or, in response to the start of the variable display of the other special symbol (in this example, the 51st variable display), the lighting extension flag (state extension flag) is reset, and the extension of the variation reduction state is completed. Is desirable.

Then, in step 076IWS75A, the value of the first special figure process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the first variation pattern setting process (step 076IWS75A). Although illustration is omitted, the symbol to be stopped is determined immediately before step 076IWS75A.

In addition, in step 076IWS59A, it is determined whether or not to make a big hit by using either the non-probability variation big jackpot determination table or the probability variation big jackpot determination table in consideration of the game state.

(First fluctuation pattern setting process)
9-12 is a flowchart showing a first variation pattern setting process (step S111A) in the first special symbol process process. In the first variation pattern setting process, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) first determines whether or not the special symbol time saving flag indicating that the variation display of the special symbol is under shortening control is set. It is confirmed (step 076IWS1700A). In this example, the special symbol time saving flag is set and the shortening control of the variable display of the special symbol is performed, which makes it advantageous to execute the variable display of the second special symbol (Fig. 9-4). (See FIGS. 9-6) Since a small hit is likely to occur, the KT state is controlled. If the special figure time saving flag is not set (that is, not in the KT state), the game control microcomputer 100 is a variation pattern table for determining a variation pattern, which is not shown in FIG. 9-4(A). The variation pattern table for the first special symbol for KT time is selected (step 076IWS1701A). If the special drawing time saving flag is set (that is, in the KT state), the game control microcomputer 100, as a variation pattern table for determining the variation pattern, KT shown in FIG. 9-4(B). The variation pattern table for the first special symbol for time is selected (step 076IWS1702A).

Next, the game control microcomputer 100, based on the variation pattern table determined in step 076IWS1701A, S1702A, and the variation pattern determination random number stored in the first special symbol determination buffer, Which of the fluctuation patterns shown in FIG. 9D is to be determined is determined (step 076IWS1703A). In this example, the variation time of the first special symbol is determined by determining the variation pattern. Further, after determining the variation time, the variation pattern in which the determined variation time is set may be selected from a plurality of variation patterns.

When the variation pattern is determined, the gaming control microcomputer 100 performs control to transmit a variation pattern command indicating the determined variation pattern to the effect control CPU 120 (step 076IWS1704A).

In addition, when the variation time (variation pattern) of the first special symbol is determined in step 076IWS1703A, the game control microcomputer 100 sets variation time data indicating the determined variation time in the first variation time timer and the variation time. While starting the measurement of (step 076IWS1705A), the variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display device 4A is started (step 076IWS1706A). Then, the game control microcomputer 100 updates the value of the first special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the first special symbol variation process (step 076IWS1707A).

(First special symbol variation process)
9-13 is a flowchart showing a first special symbol variation process (step S112A) in the first special symbol process process. In the first special symbol variation process, the CPU 103 first confirms whether or not the value of the accessory control process flag is a value indicating the accessory control normal process (step S120) (step 076IWS1120A). The case where the value of the accessory control process flag is the value indicating the accessory control normal process (step S120), that is, the value of the accessory control process flag is the gate passage waiting process (step S121) to small hit. It is a case where the value does not indicate the ending process (step S128), and it is neither during the big hit game (opening the special variable winning ball device 7 a predetermined number of times) nor during the small hit game (opening the special variable winning ball device 17). is there.

If the value of the accessory control process flag is a value indicating the accessory control normal process (step S120), the CPU 103 determines whether or not to make a big hit if it has not yet transmitted, and the big hit type. Based on the determination result, one of the display result specification commands (display result 1 specification command, display result 2 specification command, display result 3 specification command, display result 4 specification command, display result 7 specification command) is sent to the production control CPU 120. Control is performed to transmit the data (step 076IWS1121A).

Next, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the first variation time timer (step 076IWS1122A), and when the first variation time timer times out (step 076IWS1123A), performs control to transmit the first symbol determination designation command to the effect control CPU 120 ( Step 076IWS1124A). Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the first special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the first special symbol stop process (step S113A) (step 076IWS1130A).

When the first variation time timer has not timed out, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the big hit symbol is derived and displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B (step 076IWS1125A). Whether or not the big hit symbol is displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B is, for example, the value of the second special symbol process flag is a value corresponding to the second special symbol stop process, It can be determined by checking whether or not the second big hit flag indicating that the big hit is to be set based on the variable display of the second special symbol.

If the big hit symbol is not derived and displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the small hit symbol is derived and displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B (step 076IWS1126A). In addition, whether or not the small hit symbol is derived and displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B, for example, the value of the second special symbol process flag is a value corresponding to the second special symbol stop process. , It can be determined by checking whether or not the second small hit flag indicating that a small hit is set based on the variable display of the second special symbol. If the small hit symbol is not derived and displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B, the process is ended as it is.

In addition, in the present example, when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, as a general rule, there is only a case where it is determined to be a big hit or a small hit. Only when it becomes. Therefore, the determination process in step 076IWS1126A may be omitted, and if the determination in step 076IWS1125A is N, the process may directly proceed to step 076IWS1127A.

If the small-hit symbol is derived and displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the variable display of the first special symbol that is being executed is a big hit (step 076IWS1127A). . Whether or not the variable display of the first special symbol being executed is a big hit can be determined by, for example, checking whether or not the first big hit flag is set. If the variation display of the first special symbol that is being executed is not a big hit, the process ends as it is.

If the variation display of the first special symbol being executed is a big hit, the CPU 103 confirms whether the big hit type is a 10R certainty variation big hit or a 6R certainty variation big hit (step 076IWS1128A). Whether or not it is the 10R certainty variation big hit or the 6R certainty variation big hit can be determined by, for example, confirming the big hit type stored in step 076IWS63A. If it is the 10R probability variation big hit or the 6R probability variation big hit, the process is ended as it is.

When the big hit symbol is derived and displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B (Y in step 076IWS1125A), or when the small hit symbol is derived and displayed (Y in step 076IWS1126A), either the 10R certainty big hit or the 6R certainty big jackpot If not (that is, 6R normal big hit) variable display of the first special symbol is being executed (Y in step 076IWS1127A, N in step 076IWS1128A), the CPU 103 causes the production control CPU 120 to make the first compulsory symbol. Control to transmit the confirmation designation command is performed (step 076IWS1129A). In this case, if the first big hit flag and the first small hit flag are set, the CPU 103 resets the first big hit flag and the first small hit flag. Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the first special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the first special symbol stop process (step S113A) (step 076IWS1130A).

By performing the processing of steps 076IWS1125A to S1129A, in this characteristic part 076IW, when the variable display of the second special symbol is a big hit or while the variable display of the first special symbol is being executed, it is a small hit. If the normal special jackpot (in this example, 6R normal jackpot) and the variable display of the first special symbol is being executed, the variable display of the first special symbol is forcibly stopped, and the first special symbol With the second special design, the situation in which a big hit and a small hit occur at the same time does not occur. In this case, on the CPU 120 side for effect control, when the variable display of the first special symbol is forced out, the variation of the decorative symbol is based on the second compulsory symbol confirmation designation command transmitted in step 076IWS1129A. As a display result, it is controlled to forcibly discontinue display of the symbol.

In this example, when the variable display of the second special symbol is a small hit during the execution of the variable display of the first special symbol, the probability variation big hit (in this example, 10R probability variation big hit or 6R probability variation big hit) When the variable display of the first special symbol is being executed, the first special symbol variation process is terminated as it is (see Y in step 076IWS1128A), but in this case, the variable display of the second special symbol is displayed. Based on the small hit, the value of the accessory control process flag is updated to the value corresponding to the small hit opening preprocessing (step S126), and the small hit game is started. Therefore, after the next timer interruption, it is determined as N in step 076IWS1120A, the processing in steps 076IWS1121A to S1130A is skipped, and the first fluctuation time timer in step 076IWS1122A is not updated. Therefore, when the variation display of the second special symbol is a small hit and the variation display of the first special symbol which is a sure variation big hit is being executed, during the small hit game, the first variation time timer Is suspended and the variable display of the first special symbol is continuously executed. Then, when the small hit game is finished, the value of the accessory control process flag is again updated to a value corresponding to the accessory control normal process (step S120), and the update of the first variable time timer is restarted.

In addition, in this example, when the variable display of the second special symbol is a small hit during the execution of the variable display of the first special symbol, in the variable display of the first special symbol that is out or a small hit. In some cases, the first special symbol variation process is terminated as it is (see N in step 076IWS1127A). Therefore, when the variable display of the second special symbol is a small hit, even when the variable display of the first special symbol that is a shift or a small hit is being executed, the first variation during the small hit game. The update of the time timer is interrupted, the variable display of the first special symbol is continuously executed, and when the small hit game is finished, the update of the first variable time timer is restarted.

(First special symbol stop processing)
9-14 is a flowchart showing a first special symbol stop process. In the first special symbol stop processing, first, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the lighting extension flag is set (step 076IWS2010A). If the lighting extension flag is set, the CPU 103 resets the lighting extension flag that has been set (step 076IWS2011A). In addition, the CPU 103 controls to end the lighting of the right-handed indicator 26 (step 076IWS2012A) and also controls to send a right-handed lighting end designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 076IWS2013A).

In this example, since the variable winning ball device 6B (second starting winning port) is provided on the right side of the game area, if the game state is controlled to the KT state, the person who has performed the right hitting operation. Is advantageous to the player, and the right-handed indicator 26 is turned on. Therefore, in the present example, the right-handed indicator 26 is turned on during the low probability/first KT state, but the processing of steps 076IWS69A to S74A and S69B to S74B is executed, so that the 50th variation display is displayed. The low-probability/first KT state is ended at the start, the state is shifted to the normal state (non-KT state), and the processing of steps 076IWS2010A to S2013A and S2010B to S2013B is executed to end the 50th variation display. The right-handed indicator 26 is turned off at the time of performing.

Next, the CPU 103 derives and displays the stop symbol of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display device 4A (step 076IWS2014A). In this case, if the first forced symbol confirmation designation command is transmitted in step 076IWS1129A of the first special symbol variation process, regardless of the decision result at the start of variation, forced as the stop symbol of the first special symbol The outlying design is derivatized and displayed.

Next, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the first big hit flag is set (step 076IWS2015A). When the first big hit flag is set, the CPU 103 sets the big hit start flag indicating that the big hit is started (step 076IWS2016A). Further, the CPU 103 clears the first big hit flag (step 076IWS2017A).

Next, the CPU 103 controls to start the lighting of the right-handed indicator 26 (step 076IWS2018A), and at the same time, controls to send a right-handed lighting start designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 076IWS2019A). Then, the process proceeds to step 076IWS2027A.

By executing the processing of steps 076IWS2018A and S2019A, in this example, the right-handed indicator 26 is started to be turned on when a big hit occurs in the variable display of the first special symbol. That is, in this example, since the special variable winning ball device 7 (big winning hole) is provided on the right side of the game area in this example, it is advantageous for the player to perform a right-handed operation during the big hit game. Therefore, the right-handed indicator 26 is turned on.

In this example, after the big hit symbol is derived and displayed, the big hit game is started based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the passing gate 41, so the right hit is made at the timing when the game ball passes through the passing gate 41. The display 26 may be configured to start lighting.

When the first big hit flag is not set (N in step 076IWS2015A), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the first small hit flag is set (step 076IWS2020A). When the first small hit flag is set, control is performed to send a small hit start designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 076IWS2021A). Further, the CPU 103 clears the first small hit flag (step 076IWS2022A). Then, the CPU 103 sets the value of the accessory control process flag to a value corresponding to the small hit opening pretreatment (step 076IWS2026A). Then, the process proceeds to step 076IWS2027A.

Then, the CPU 103 sets the value of the first special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the first special symbol normal process (step 076IWS2027A).

In this example, when the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the first special symbol, the right hit notification for prompting the player to shoot a game ball to the right of the game area can be executed. There is. In addition, when the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed with the first special symbol, as a right hit notification, it is possible to execute a launch promotion alert that prompts the player to shoot the game ball aiming at the passage gate 41. May be.

Also, in the state where the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the second special symbol, right-handing notification and launch promotion information are not executed, and in that state when the game ball wins the first start winning opening, right-handing notification and launch promotion information (In this case, because it is in the gate passage waiting state, even if the game ball wins the first starting winning opening, the variable display of the first special symbol does not start immediately and becomes the first reserved memory) You may comprise.

On the other hand, when the passage of the game ball at the passage gate 41 is detected in the normal state (low probability/non-KT state), the degree of recognition is low (for example, sound output of small volume or small screen display). Thus, it may be configured to perform a left-hand hit notification that prompts the player to shoot a game ball to the left of the game area. On the other hand, in the normal state (low probability/non-KT state), when the winning of the game ball to the second starting winning opening or the special winning opening is detected, a mode in which the degree of recognition is high (for example, a loud sound output or A left-handed notification may be provided by a large screen display). With such a configuration, it is possible to accurately notify the launch. In particular, with the above configuration, for the player who accidentally shoots the game ball to the right of the game area, while performing a slight left-handing notification while the degree of recognition to the surroundings of the game machine is low. For a player who intentionally performs a right-handed operation, left-handed notification may be performed in a manner in which the degree of recognition of the surroundings of the gaming machine is high. With such a configuration, the player who intentionally performs the right-handed operation can be urged by the clerk of the game store to return to the left-handed operation.

Further, in the above case, the left-handed notification may be performed when the number of game balls detected at the passage gate 41, the second starting winning opening, and the special winning opening reaches a certain number. In addition, in the passage gate 41, when the game ball is detected a plurality of times (for example, 5 times) within a predetermined period (for example, 1 minute), a left-handed notification is given, and the second start winning opening and the special winning opening are more than a predetermined number. Even if a small number (eg, one) of gaming balls is detected, a left hit notification may be performed.

The characteristic part 076IW displays a demo when a specific condition is satisfied. When the winning of the game ball is detected, the execution of the demonstration display that has been executed may be terminated and the left-handed notification may be performed.

(Second special symbol normal processing)
9-15 is a flowchart showing a second special symbol normal process in the second special symbol process process. The state in which the second special symbol normal process is executed is a case where the value of the second special symbol process flag is a value indicating the second special symbol normal process. In addition, when the value of the second special symbol process flag is a value indicating the second special symbol normal processing, there is a state in which the variable display of the second special symbol is not made in the second special symbol display device 4B.

In the second special symbol normal process, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103), first, the value of the accessory control process flag is a value indicating the accessory control normal process (step S120) It is confirmed whether or not (step 076IWS50B). The case where the value of the accessory control process flag is the value indicating the accessory control normal process (step S120), that is, the value of the accessory control process flag is the gate passage waiting process (step S121) to small hit. It is a case where the value does not indicate the ending process (step S128), and it is neither during the big hit game (the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened a predetermined number of times) nor during the small hit game (the special variable winning ball device 17 is opened). is there.

If the value of the accessory control process flag is a value indicating the accessory control normal processing (step S120), the game control microcomputer 100 confirms the value of the second reserved storage number (step 076IWS51B). Specifically, the count value of the second reserved storage number counter is confirmed. If the number of second reserved memories is 0, the second customer waiting demonstration display designation command is transmitted to the effect control CPU 120 (step 076IWS52B).

If the second reserved storage number is not 0, the game control microcomputer 100 reads each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the reserved storage number=1 in the second reserved storage buffer of the RAM 102, and reads the random number value of the RAM 102. The value is stored in the second random number buffer area (step 076IWS53B), the value of the second reserved storage number is decremented by 1 (the count value of the second reserved storage number counter is decremented by 1), and the content of each storage area is shifted. (Step 076 IWS54B). That is, in the second reserved storage buffer of the RAM 102, each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved storage number=n (n=2, 3, 4) is converted into the second reserved storage number=n−1. Store in the storage area corresponding to. Therefore, the order in which the random number values stored in the respective storage areas corresponding to the respective second reserved storage numbers are extracted always matches the order of the second reserved storage numbers=1, 2, 3, 4. It is like this. That is, in this example, the content of each storage area is shifted each time the variable display start condition is satisfied, so that the order in which each random value is extracted can be specified.

Next, the game control microcomputer 100 performs control to transmit a set value command indicating the set value set in the RAM 102 to the effect control board 12 (step 076IWS55B). In this example, the setting value command is transmitted every time the variable display is started by executing the processing of step 076IWS55B, but the setting change processing (processing of changing the setting value) is performed when the power is turned on. The set value command is also sent when is executed.

After that, the game control microcomputer 100 transmits a background designation command according to the current game state to the effect control CPU 120 (step 076IWS56B). The specific method of transmitting the background designation command is the same as the processing shown in step 076IWS56A of the first special symbol normal processing.

Next, the game control microcomputer 100 determines whether or not the big hit of the first special symbol is changing (step 076IWS57B). Specifically, it is determined that the big hit of the first special symbol is changing when the first big hit flag indicating that it is a big hit based on the variable display of the first special symbol is set. If it is determined that the big bonus of the first special symbol is changing, the process proceeds to step 076IWS69B without performing the processing after step 076IWS58B. As a result, when the variation of the second special symbol is started during the variation of the big bonus of the first special symbol, it is forcibly disengaged regardless of whether or not the jackpot determination value is stored.

The method of forcibly disengaging is not limited to the above. For example, when the big hit of the first special symbol is changing in step 076IWS57B, a process of setting a random number value (fixed value) that is out of alignment as a random number for hitting determination is performed, and the process proceeds to step 076IWS59B, which causes a start winning prize. It may be forcibly deviated regardless of whether or not the random number for hit determination has been acquired.

In addition, for example, when the big hit of the first special symbol is changing in step 076IWS57B, a random number value (fixed value) that is a deviation is set as the hit determination random number without performing the processing in steps 076IWS58B to S63B and is small. By making the hit determination, the hit determination may be forcibly disregarded regardless of which random number for the hit determination was obtained at the time of winning the start prize.

When the big hit of the first special symbol is not changing, the game controlling microcomputer 100 reads the hit judging random number from the second random number storing buffer (step 076IWS58B), and executes the big hit judging module (step 076IWS59B). The big hit determination module is a program that decides to make a big hit if the random number for hit determination matches a predetermined big hit determination value. When it is determined to be a big hit (step 076IWS60B), the game control microcomputer 100 sets a second big hit flag indicating that it is a big hit based on the variable display of the second special symbol (step 076IWS61B). .. Then, based on the hit type determination random number, it is determined whether the big hit type is a 10R certainty change big hit, a 6R certainty change big hit, a 2R certainty change big hit, or a 2R normal big hit (step 076IWS62B), and the big hit type is stored (step 076IWS63B). ), and proceeds to step 076IWS69B.

If the big hit is not made in step 076IWS60B, the game control microcomputer 100 executes the small hit determination module (step 076IWS64B). The small hitting determination module is a program that decides to make a small hit if the random number for hitting determination (or a random number for small hitting determination) matches a predetermined small hitting determination value. When it is determined to be a small hit (step 076IWS65B), the game control microcomputer 100 sets a second small hit flag indicating that a small hit will be made based on the variable display of the second special symbol ( Step 076IWS66B). In this example, as shown in FIG. 9-2, when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, if the big hit is not determined, the determination values are allotted to be the small hit. Therefore, the processing of steps 076IWS64B and S65B may be omitted, and when it is determined to be N in step 076IWS60B, the process may directly proceed to step 076IWS66B and the second small hit flag may be set. Then, the process proceeds to step 076IWS69B.

Next, the game control microcomputer 100 determines whether or not the value of the high base number counter is "0" (step 076IWS69B), and if it is "0", shifts to step 076IWS75B. If the value of the high base number counter is not "0", that is, if it is in the low probability/first KT state, the game control microcomputer 100 subtracts "1" from the value of the high base number counter (step 076IWS70B), It is determined whether or not it has become "0" (step 076IWS71B). When the value of the high base number counter does not become "0", the process proceeds to step 076IWS75B. When the value of the high base number counter becomes “0”, the game control microcomputer 100 resets the high base flag indicating that it is in the high base state (step 076IWS72B), and shortens the variable display of the special symbol. The special figure time saving flag indicating that control is in progress is reset (step 076IWS73B). Further, the game controlling microcomputer 100 sets a lighting extension flag (state extension flag) (step 076IWS74B). Then, the process proceeds to step 076IWS75B.

Then, in step 076IWS75B, the value of the second special figure process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the second variation pattern setting process (step 076IWS75B). Although illustration is omitted, the symbol to be stopped is determined immediately before step 076IWS75B.

In addition, in step 076IWS59B, in consideration of the game state, it is determined whether or not to make a big hit, using either the non-probability change big hit judgment table or the probability change big hit judgment table.

The second variation pattern setting process is the same as the first variation pattern setting process (step S111A) shown in FIG. 9-12. That is, in the first variation pattern setting process shown in FIGS. 9-12, the second variation pattern process has been described by replacing “first” with “second”. However, in the second variation pattern setting process, the CPU 103 first performs the same process as in step 076IWS1700A and confirms whether the special figure time saving flag is set. If the special time saving flag is not set (that is, not in the KT state), the game control microcomputer 100 is a variation pattern table for determining a variation pattern, which is not shown in FIG. 9-5(C). The variation pattern table for the second special symbol for KT is selected. If the special figure time saving flag is set (that is, in the KT state), the game control microcomputer 100 changes depending on whether the probability variation flag and the high base flag are set or not, and the number of variations. As the variation pattern table for determining the pattern, the variation pattern table for the second special symbol for any KT time shown in FIGS. 9-5(D) to 9-6(I) is selected. For example, if the probability variation flag is off and the high base flag is on (low probability/first KT state), if it is the first variation, the variation pattern table for the second special symbol shown in FIG. 9-5(D). Select, the variation pattern table for the second special symbol shown in FIG. 9-5 (E) is the second variation shown in FIG. 9-5 (F) if it is the 50th variation. Select the variable pattern table for special symbols. Further, for example, if both the probability variation flag and the high base flag are on (high probability/first KT state), if it is the first variation, variation for the second special symbol shown in FIG. 9-6(G) The pattern table is selected, and if it is the second variation or later, the variation pattern table for the second special symbol shown in FIG. 9-6(H) is selected. Further, for example, if the probability variation flag is on and the high base flag is off (high probability/second KT state), the second special symbol variation pattern table shown in FIG. 9-6(I) is selected.

(Second special symbol variation process)
9-16 is a flowchart showing a second special symbol variation process in the second special symbol process process. In the second special symbol variation processing, the CPU 103 first confirms whether or not the value of the accessory control process flag is a value indicating the accessory control normal processing (step S120) (step 076IWS1120B). The case where the value of the accessory control process flag is the value indicating the accessory control normal process (step S120), that is, the value of the accessory control process flag is the gate passage waiting process (step S121) to small hit. It is a case where the value does not indicate the ending process (step S128), and it is neither during the big hit game (opening the special variable winning ball device 7 a predetermined number of times) nor during the small hit game (opening the special variable winning ball device 17). is there.

If the value of the accessory control process flag is a value indicating the accessory control normal process (step S120), the CPU 103 determines whether or not to make a big hit if it has not yet transmitted, and the big hit type. Any of the display result specification commands (display result 1 specification command, display result 2 specification command, display result 3 specification command, display result 5 specification command, display result 6 specification command, display result 7 specification command) based on the determination result. Is transmitted to the effect control CPU 120 (step 076IWS1121B).

Next, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the second variable time timer (step 076IWS1122B), and when the second variable time timer times out (step 076IWS1123B), performs control to send the second symbol confirmation designation command to the effect control CPU 120 ( Step 076IWS1124B). Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the second special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the second special symbol stop processing (step 076IWS1130B).

When the second fluctuation time timer has not timed out, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the big hit symbol is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A (step 076IWS1125B). Whether or not the jackpot symbol is displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A is, for example, the value of the first special symbol process flag is a value corresponding to the first special symbol stop process, It can be determined by checking whether or not the first big hit flag indicating that the big hit is to be set based on the variable display of the first special symbol.

If the big hit symbol is not derived and displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the small hit symbol is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A (step 076IWS1126B). Whether or not the small hit symbol is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A is, for example, the value of the first special symbol process flag is a value corresponding to the first special symbol stop process. , It can be determined by checking whether or not the first small hit flag indicating that a small hit is set based on the variable display of the first special symbol. If the small-hit symbol is not derived and displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A, the process is ended as it is.

If the small-hit symbol is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the variable display of the second special symbol that is being executed is a big hit (step 076IWS1127B). .. Whether or not the variable display of the second special symbol that is being executed is a big hit can be determined by, for example, checking whether or not the second big hit flag is set. If the variation display of the second special symbol that is being executed is not a big hit, the process is ended as it is.

If the variation display of the second special symbol that is being executed is a big hit, the CPU 103 confirms whether the big hit type is 10R certainty variation big hit, 6R certainty variation big hit, or 2R certainty variation big hit (step 076IWS1128B). .. Whether it is the 10R certainty variation jackpot, the 6R certainty variation jackpot, or the 2R certainty variation jackpot can be determined, for example, by checking the jackpot type stored in step 076IWS63B. If it is the 10R certainty variation big hit, the 6R certainty variation big hit, or the 2R certainty variation big hit, the processing is finished as it is.

When the big hit symbol is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A (Y in step 076IWS1125B), or when the small hit symbol is derived and displayed (Y in step 076IWS1126B), 10R certainty variation big hit, 6R certainty variation big hit, and When the variable display of the second special symbol which is neither a 2R probability variation big hit (that is, a 2R normal big hit) is being executed (Y in step 076IWS1127B, N in step 076IWS1128B), the CPU 103 controls the effect control CPU 120. The control for transmitting the second compulsory symbol confirmation designation command is performed (step 076IWS1129B). In this case, if the second big hit flag and the second small hit flag are set, the CPU 103 resets the second big hit flag and the second small hit flag. Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the second special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the second special symbol stop processing (step 076IWS1130B).

By performing the processing of steps 076IWS1125B to S1129B, in this characteristic part 076IW, when the variable display of the first special symbol is a big hit or while the variable display of the second special symbol is being executed, it is a small hit. If it is normal big hit (in this example, 2R normal big hit) and the variable display of the second special symbol is being executed, the variable display of the second special symbol is forcibly stopped, and the first special symbol. With the second special design, the situation in which a big hit and a small hit occur at the same time does not occur. In this case, on the production control CPU 120 side, when the variable display of the second special symbol is forced out, the variation of the decorative symbol is based on the second compulsory symbol confirmation designation command transmitted in step 076IWS1129B. As a display result, it is controlled to forcibly discontinue display of the symbol.

In this example, when the variable display of the first special symbol is a small hit during the execution of the variable display of the second special symbol, the probability variation big hit (in this example, 10R probability variation big hit, 6R probability variation big hit, Or 2R certainty variation big hit) When the variation display of the second special symbol is being executed, the second special symbol variation process is terminated as it is (see Y in step 076IWS1128B), but in this case, the first special symbol Based on the fact that the variable display of the symbol is a small hit, the value of the accessory control process flag is updated to the value corresponding to the small hit opening preprocessing (step S126), and the small hit game is started. Therefore, after the next timer interruption, it is determined as N in step 076IWS1120B, the processing in steps 076IWS1121B to S1130B is skipped, and the second variable time timer in step 076IWS1122B is not updated. Therefore, when the variable display of the first special symbol is a small hit and the variable display of the second special symbol which is a sure variation big hit is being executed, during the small hit game, the second variable time timer Is suspended and the variable display of the second special symbol is continuously executed. Then, when the small hit game is finished, the value of the accessory control process flag is updated again to the value corresponding to the accessory control normal process (step S120), and the update of the second variable time timer is restarted.

Further, in this example, when the variable display of the first special symbol is a small hit during the execution of the variable display of the second special symbol, during the variable display of the second special symbol that is out or a small hit. In some cases, the second special symbol variation process is ended as it is (see N in step 076IWS1127B). Therefore, when the variable display of the first special symbol is a small hit, even when the variable display of the second special symbol which is a deviation or a small hit is being executed, during the small hit game, the second variation The update of the time timer is interrupted and the variable display of the second special symbol is continuously executed, and when the small hit game is finished, the update of the second variable time timer is restarted.

With the above configuration, the remaining second reserved memory can be consumed in the normal state after the end of the first KT state (after the end of the time saving state), and a big hit occurs at an unintended timing when the player is absent. Can be suppressed.

In addition, it is configured to provide a variable winning ball device for the first special symbol below the winning ball device 6A (first starting winning opening), and a winning ball device for the second special symbol to the right of the game area ( In a gaming machine configured to be provided with a starting winning opening which is not a variable winning ball device) and which is configured to shift to a normal state via the time saving state of the first special symbol after the end of the second KT state (small hit RUSH) As described above, the configuration in which the variable display of the second special symbol is forcibly removed may be applied. In this case, because the variation efficiency of the first special symbol is high, the frequency of small hits based on the variation display of the first special symbol is also high, but the variation display of the second special symbol is forcibly removed accordingly. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of the variable display of the second special symbol based on the second reserved memory in the normal state by increasing the frequency of playing, and further suppress the occurrence of the big hit at an unintended timing when the player is absent. You can

(Second special symbol stop processing)
FIG. 9-17 is a flowchart showing a second special symbol stop process. In the second special symbol stop process, first, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the lighting extension flag is set (step 076IWS2010B). If the lighting extension flag is set, the CPU 103 resets the lighting extension flag that has been set (step 076IWS2011B). In addition, the CPU 103 controls to end the lighting of the right-handed indicator 26 (step 076IWS2012B) and also controls to send a right-handed lighting end designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 076IWS2013B).

Next, the CPU 103 derives and displays the stop symbol of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display device 4B (step 076IWS2014B). In this case, if the second compulsory symbol confirmation designation command is transmitted in step 076IWS1129B of the second special symbol variation process, regardless of the determination result at the start of variation, the second special symbol is forced to be a stop symbol. The outlying design is derivatized and displayed.

Next, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the second jackpot flag is set (step 076IWS2015B). When the second big hit flag is set, the CPU 103 sets the big hit start flag (step 076IWS2016B). Further, the CPU 103 clears the second big hit flag (step 076IWS2017B).

Next, the CPU 103 controls to start the lighting of the right-handed indicator 26 (step 076IWS2018B) and also controls to send a right-handed lighting start designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 076IWS2019B). Then, the process proceeds to step 076IWS2027B.

By executing the processing of steps 076IWS2018B and S2019B, in the present example, the right-handed indicator 26 is started to be lit when a big hit occurs in the variable display of the second special symbol. That is, in this example, since the special variable winning ball device 7 (big winning hole) is provided on the right side of the game area in this example, it is advantageous for the player to perform a right-handed operation during the big hit game. Therefore, the right-handed indicator 26 is turned on.

When the second jackpot flag is not set (N in step 076IWS2015B), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the second jackpot flag is set (step 076IWS2020B). When the second small hit flag is set, the small hit start designation command is transmitted to the effect control CPU 120 (step 076IWS2021B). Further, the CPU 103 clears the second small hit flag (step 076IWS2022B).

In addition, in the present example, when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, it is determined as a big hit or a small hit in principle, so that it is determined to be N in step 076IWS2020B, which is extremely rare. This is the case. Therefore, the process of step 076IWS2020B may be omitted, and when it is determined as N in step 076IWS2015B, the process may directly proceed to step 076IWS2021B.

Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the special drawing time saving flag is set (step 076IWS2023B). If the special drawing time saving flag is not set (that is, not in the KT state), the CPU 103 performs control to start lighting of the right-handed indicator 26 (step 076IWS2024B) and right to the effect control CPU 120. The control for transmitting the striking and lighting start designation command is performed (step 076IWS2025B).

Then, the CPU 103 sets the value of the accessory control process flag to a value corresponding to the small hit opening pretreatment (step 076IWS2026B). Then, the process proceeds to step 076IWS2027B.

By executing the processing of step 076IWS2024B, S2025B, in this example, when the small hit in the variable display of the second special symbol, the right-handed indicator 26 is turned on. That is, in this example, since the special variable winning ball device 17 (special winning opening) is provided on the right side of the game area in this example, it is better for the player to perform a right-handed operation during the small hit game. Advantageously, the right-handed indicator 26 is illuminated.

However, in the present example, even if the small hit occurs in the variable display of the second special symbol, the right-handed indicator 26 should have already been turned on when the KT state is in effect. Therefore, in this example, by performing the determination process of step 076IWS2023B, when a small hit occurs in the variable display of the second special symbol during the KT state, the right-handed indicator 26 is started to light up in duplicate. Also, the process of transmitting the right-handed lighting start designation command is not performed.

Then, the CPU 103 sets the value of the second special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the second special symbol normal process (step 076IWS2027B).

(Normal processing for accessory control)
FIG. 9-18 is a flowchart showing the accessory control normal processing (step S120) in the accessory control process processing. In the accessory control normal processing, the CPU 103 first confirms whether or not the big hit start flag is set (step 076IWS2101). If the jackpot start flag is not set, the process is terminated.

If the big hit start flag is set, the CPU 103 resets the big hit start flag (step 076IWS2102). Next, the CPU 103 sets a big winning opening pre-opening timer (step 076IWS2103), sets round 1 opening pattern data according to the big hit type (step 076IWS2104), and sets "1" to a round number counter indicating the number of big hits. Is set (step 076IWS2105).

Then, the CPU 103 sets the value of the accessory control process flag to a value corresponding to the gate passage waiting process (step 076IWS2106).

(Gate passage waiting process)
FIG. 9-19 is a flowchart showing a gate passage waiting process (step S121) in the accessory control process process. In the gate passage waiting process, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the detection signal from the gate switch 21 is input (step 076IWS2501). If the detection signal from the gate switch 21 has not been input, the processing ends. If the detection signal from the gate switch 21 is input, the CPU 103 resets the probability change flag, the high base flag, and the special drawing time saving flag if set, and clears the value of the high base number counter to 0 ( Step 076IWS2502). Next, the CPU 103 transmits a big hit start designation command (step 076IWS2503) and sets the value of the accessory control process flag to a value corresponding to the big hit opening preprocessing (step 076IWS2504).

In this characteristic part 076IW, by executing the gate passage waiting process, when the big hit symbol is derived and displayed as the variable display result of the second special symbol, the big hit game is not started immediately, but the passage gate 41 is played. It is configured to shift to the big hit game on condition that the ball passes and is detected by the gate switch 21.

(Big hit end processing)
FIG. 9-20 is a flowchart showing the big hit ending process (step S125) in the accessory control process process. In the big hit ending process, the CPU 103 checks whether or not the big hit end display timer is set (step 076IWS2200), and when the big hit end display timer is set, moves to step 076IWS2202. When the big hit end display timer is not set, the CPU 103 corresponds to the display time corresponding to the time during which the big hit end display is being performed on the image display device 5 (big hit end display time). A value is set (step 076IWS2201), and the process ends.

In step 076IWS2202, the value of the jackpot end display timer is decremented by 1 (step 076IWS2202). Then, the CPU 103 checks whether or not the value of the big hit end display timer is 0, that is, whether the big hit end display time has elapsed (step 076IWS2203). If not, the process ends.

If the jackpot end display time has passed (Y in step 076IWS2203), the CPU 103 checks whether or not the type of the jackpot that has ended this time is a 10R certainty variation jackpot or a 2R certainty variation jackpot (step 076IWS2204). Whether or not the 10R probability variation big hit or the 2R probability variation big hit can be determined, for example, by confirming the big hit type stored in step 076IWS63A of the first special symbol normal processing or step 076IWS63B of the second special symbol normal processing. If it is the 10R probability variation big hit or the 2R probability variation big hit, the CPU 103 sets the probability variation flag and shifts to the probability variation state (high probability state) (step 076IWS2205). Further, the CPU 103 sets the special figure time saving flag and shifts to the KT state (step 076IWS2206). Then, the process proceeds to step 076IWS2214. In the case of the 10R certainty variation big hit or the 2R certainty variation big hit, the high base flag is not set, so the high probability/low base state (high probability/second KT state) is controlled.

If neither the 10R certainty variation jackpot nor the 2R certainty variation jackpot, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the type of the jackpot that has ended this time is the 6R certainty variation jackpot (step 076IWS2207). Whether or not the 6R probability variation big hit can be determined, for example, by checking the big hit type stored in step 076IWS63A of the first special symbol normal process or step 076IWS63B of the second special symbol normal process. If the 6R probability variation big hit, the CPU 103 sets the probability variation flag and shifts to the probability variation state (high probability state) (step 076IWS2208). Further, the CPU 103 sets the high base flag and shifts to the high base state (step 076IWS2209), and further sets the special figure time saving flag and shifts to the KT state (step 076IWS2210). Then, the process proceeds to step 076IWS2214. Therefore, in the case of the 6R certainty variation jackpot, it is controlled to a high probability/high base state (high probability/first KT state).

In the case of a 6R probability variation big hit, only the high base flag is set and the high base number counter is not set. In this case, since the high base number counter is reset to 0 when the big hit game is started (see step 076IWS2502 of the gate passage waiting process), the value of the high base number counter remains 0. Therefore, after the jackpot game based on 6R probability variation jackpot is controlled to a high probability/high base state (high probability/first KT state), and since the value of the high base number counter is 0 in the variable display thereafter, It is determined as Y in step 076IWS69A of the first special symbol normal process or step 076IWS69B of the second special symbol normal process, and the subtraction process of the high base number counter of step 076IWS70A or step 076IWS70B is not performed. Then, the high probability/high base state (high probability/first KT state) is maintained until the next big hit occurs.

If it is not the 6R probability variation big hit (that is, if it is the 6R normal big hit or the 2R normal big hit), the CPU 103 sets the high base flag to shift to the high base state (step 076IWS2211), and sets the special time saving flag. And shifts to the KT state (step 076IWS2212). Further, the CPU 103 sets “50” in the high base number counter (step 076IWS2213). Then, the process proceeds to step 076IWS2214. Therefore, in the case of 6R normal big hit or 2R normal big hit, it is controlled to a low probability/high base state (low probability/first KT state).

Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the accessory control process flag to a value corresponding to the accessory control normal processing (step 076IWS2214).

(Small hit end processing)
FIG. 9-21 is a flowchart showing a small hit ending process (step S128) in the accessory control process process. In the small hit end processing, the CPU 103 checks whether or not the small hit end display timer is set (step 076IWS2300), and when the small hit end display timer is set, moves to step 076IWS2302. When the small hit end display timer is not set, the CPU 103 causes the small hit end display timer to display a time corresponding to the time when the small hit end display is performed on the image display device 5 (small hit end display time). A value corresponding to time is set (step 076IWS2301), and the process ends.

In step 076IWS2302, the value of the small hit end display timer is decremented by 1 (step 076IWS2302). Then, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the value of the small hit end display timer is 0, that is, whether the small hit end display time has elapsed (step 076IWS2303). If not, the process ends.

If the small hit end display time has elapsed (Y in step 076IWS2303), the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the special drawing time saving flag is set (step 076IWS2304). If the special drawing time saving flag is not set (that is, not in the KT state), the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the right-handed indicator 26 is lighting (step 076IWS2305). If the right-handed indicator 26 is on, the CPU 103 controls to end the right-handed indicator 26 (step 076IWS2306), and at the same time, sends a right-handed illumination end designation command to the effect control CPU 120. Control is performed (step 076IWS2307).

In this example, when the variable display of the second special symbol is a small hit in the non-KT state, the right hit indicator 26 is turned on at the start of the small hit game (steps 076IWS2023B to S2025B). ), by executing the processing of steps 076IWS2304 to S2307, the lighting of the right-handed indicator 26 ends at the end of the small hit game.

Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the accessory control process flag to a value corresponding to the accessory control normal processing (step 076IWS2308).

(Transition of game state)
Here, the transition of the game state in the characteristic part 076IW will be described. FIG. 9-22 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a way of transition of the game state in this characteristic unit 076IW. First, in this characteristic part 076IW, in a low probability/low base state (normal state (non-KT state)), the player aims at the left side of the game area and performs a shooting operation (left hit) of the game ball. Therefore, in the normal state, mainly the start winning to the first start winning opening occurs, mainly the variable display of the first special symbol is executed. Further, since the variable display of the first special symbol is mainly executed, when a big hit occurs in a low probability/low base state, mainly a 10R certainty variation big hit, a 6R certainty variation big hit, or a 6R normal big hit occurs.

As shown in FIG. 9-22, when the 10R probability variation big hit occurs in the low probability/low base state, the high probability/low base state (high probability/second KT state) shifts after the end of the big hit game, The high probability/low base state is maintained until the next big hit occurs (see steps 076IWS2204 to S2206). Also, when the 6R certainty variation big hit occurs in the low probability/low base state, after the big hit game is over, the state shifts to the high probability/high base state (high probability/first KT state) until the next big hit occurs. The high probability/high base state is maintained (see steps 076IWS2207 to S2210). In addition, when the 6R normal big hit occurs in the low probability/low base state, after the big hit game ends, the low probability/high base state (low probability/first KT state) is entered, and the next big hit occurs? The low-probability/high-base state is maintained until the variable display of 50 times is completed (see steps 076IWS2211-S2213).

When the KT state (high-probability/high-base state, low-probability/high-base state, high-probability/low-base state) has been entered, in this feature 076IW, the player aims at the right side of the game area. And perform the shooting operation (right hit) of the game ball. Therefore, in the KT state, a start winning is mainly generated in the second starting winning opening, and a variable display of the second special symbol is mainly executed. Further, since the variable display of the second special symbol is mainly executed, when the big hit occurs in the KT state, mainly 10R certainty change big hit, 6R certainty change big hit, 2R certainty change big hit, or 2R normal big hit occurs.

As shown in FIG. 9-22, when a 10R certainty variation jackpot or a 2R certainty variation jackpot occurs in a high probability/high base state (high probability/first KT state), a high probability/low base state after the end of the big hit game. (High probability/second KT state), and the high probability/low base state is maintained until the next big hit (see steps 076IWS2204 to S2206). In addition, when the 6R certainty variation big hit occurs in the high probability/high base state (high probability/first KT state), it shifts to the high probability/high base state (high probability/first KT state) after the end of the big hit game. , The high probability/high base state is maintained until the next big hit occurs (see steps 076IWS2207 to S2210). In addition, in this characteristic part 076IW, when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, the probability of being a 6R certainty variation jackpot is 50% in total (see FIG. 9-3 ), so once high probability/high In the base state, the high probability/high base state is looped at a rate of 50%. Also, when a 2R normal jackpot occurs in a high-probability/high-base state (high-probability/first KT state), it shifts to a low-probability/high-base state (low-probability/first KT state) after the jackpot game is over. , The low probability/high base state is maintained until the next big hit occurs or the variable display of 50 times is completed (see steps 076IWS2211-S2213).

As shown in FIG. 9-22, when a 10R certainty variation jackpot or a 2R certainty variation jackpot occurs in a low-probability/high-base state (low-probability/first KT state), a high-probability/low-base state after the jackpot game ends. (High probability/second KT state), and the high probability/low base state is maintained until the next big hit (see steps 076IWS2204 to S2206). In addition, when the 6R certainty variation big hit occurs in the low probability/high base state (low probability/first KT state), it shifts to the high probability/high base state (high probability/first KT state) after the big hit game ends. , The high probability/high base state is maintained until the next big hit occurs (see steps 076IWS2207 to S2210). Also, when a 2R normal big hit occurs in a low probability/high base state (low probability/first KT state), it shifts to a low probability/high base state (low probability/first KT state) after the end of the big hit game. , The low probability/high base state is maintained until the next big hit occurs or the variable display of 50 times is completed (see steps 076IWS2211-S2213). In the characteristic part 076IW, when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, the probability of being a 2R normal jackpot is 35% (see FIGS. 9-3(D) and (E)), Once the low probability/high base state is reached, the low probability/high base state is looped at a rate of 35%. In addition, after the 6R normal big hit and the 2R normal big hit occur and the low probability/high base state is achieved, the next big hit does not occur and the variable display of 50 times is completed, FIG. As shown, a low probability/low base state (normal state (non-KT state)) is entered (see steps 076IWS69A to S73A, S69B to S73B).

As shown in FIG. 9-22, when a 10R certainty variation jackpot or a 2R certainty variation jackpot occurs in a high-probability/low-base state (high-probability/second KT state), a high-probability/low-base state after the jackpot game ends. (High probability/second KT state), and the high probability/low base state is maintained until the next big hit (see steps 076IWS2204 to S2206). In addition, in this characteristic part 076IW, when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, the probability of 10R certainty variation big hit or 2R certainty variation big hit is 15 % (See FIGS. 9-3(D) and (E)), once the high probability/low base state is reached, the high probability/low base state loops at a rate of 15%. In addition, when the 6R certainty variation big hit occurs in the high probability/low base state (high probability/second KT state), it shifts to the high probability/high base state (high probability/first KT state) after the end of the big hit game. , The high probability/high base state is maintained until the next big hit occurs (see steps 076IWS2207 to S2210). Also, when a 2R normal jackpot occurs in a high-probability/low-base state (high-probability/second KT state), it shifts to a low-probability/high-base state (low-probability/first KT state) after the jackpot game ends. , The low probability/high base state is maintained until the next big hit occurs or the variable display of 50 times is completed (see steps 076IWS2211-S2213).

In addition, in FIG. 9-22, the low probability/low base state (normal state (non-KT state)) describes the case where the variable display of the first special symbol is executed, but the variation of the second special symbol at a low rate. It is possible that the display may be performed. In this case, when the 10R certainty variation big hit or the 2R certainty variation big hit occurs, the state shifts to a high probability/low base state (high probability/second KT state). Further, when the 6R certainty variation big hit occurs, the state shifts to a high probability/high base state (high probability/first KT state). Also, when a 2R normal big hit occurs, it shifts to a low probability/high base state (low probability/first KT state), and the low probability/high until the next big hit occurs or the 50 times of variable display is completed. The base state will be maintained.

Further, in FIG. 9-22, the case where the variable display of the second special symbol is executed in the high probability/high base state (high probability/first KT state) has been described, but the variable display of the first special symbol at a low rate. May be performed. In this case, when the 10R certainty variation big hit occurs, the state shifts to the high probability/low base state (high probability/second KT state). Further, when the 6R certainty variation big hit occurs, the state shifts to a high probability/high base state (high probability/first KT state). Also, when a 6R normal big hit occurs, it shifts to a low probability/high base state (low probability/first KT state), and the low probability/high until the next big hit occurs or 50 times of variable display is completed. The base state will be maintained.

Further, in FIG. 9-22, the case where the variable display of the second special symbol is executed in the low probability/high base state (low probability/first KT state) has been described, but the variable display of the first special symbol at a low rate. May be performed. In this case, when the 10R certainty variation big hit occurs, the state shifts to the high probability/low base state (high probability/second KT state). Further, when the 6R certainty variation big hit occurs, the state shifts to a high probability/high base state (high probability/first KT state). Also, when a 6R normal big hit occurs, it shifts to a low probability/high base state (low probability/first KT state), and the low probability/high until the next big hit occurs or 50 times of variable display is completed. The base state will be maintained.

Further, in FIG. 9-22, the case where the variable display of the second special symbol is executed in the high probability/low base state (high probability/second KT state) has been described, but the variable display of the first special symbol at a low rate. May be performed. In this case, when the 10R certainty variation big hit occurs, the state shifts to the high probability/low base state (high probability/second KT state). Further, when the 6R certainty variation big hit occurs, the state shifts to a high probability/high base state (high probability/first KT state). Also, when a 6R normal big hit occurs, it shifts to a low probability/high base state (low probability/first KT state), and the low probability/high until the next big hit occurs or 50 times of variable display is completed. The base state will be maintained.

(Command analysis process)
Next, the operation of the effect control means will be described. 9-23 to 9-27 are flowcharts showing a specific example of the command analysis process (step S75). The effect control command received from the main board 11 is stored in the received command buffer, but in the command analysis processing, the effect control CPU 120 confirms the content of the command stored in the command reception buffer.

In the command analysis process, the effect control CPU 120 first confirms whether or not the received command is stored in the command reception buffer (step 076IWS611). Whether it is stored or not is determined by comparing the value of the command reception number counter with the read pointer. The case where both match is the case where the received command is not stored. When the received command is stored in the command reception buffer, the effect control CPU 120 reads the received command from the command reception buffer (step 076IWS612). When read, the value of the read pointer is set to +2 (step 076IWS613). The reason why +2 is performed is that two bytes (one command) are read.

If the received effect control command is the set value command (step 076IWS614), the effect control CPU 0120 stores the set value indicated by the received set value command in the set value storage area formed in the RAM 122 (step). 076IWS615).

If the received effect control command is the variation pattern command (step 076IWS616), the effect control CPU 120 stores the received variation pattern command in the variation pattern command storage area formed in the RAM 122 (step 076IWS617). Then, the variation pattern command reception flag is set (step 076IWS618).

If the received production control command is the display result designation command (step 076IWS619), the production control CPU 120 stores the received display result designation command in the display result designation command storage area formed in the RAM 122 (step 076IWS620). ).

If the received production control command is any symbol confirmation designation command (first symbol confirmation designation command, second symbol confirmation designation command, first forced symbol confirmation designation command, second forced symbol confirmation designation command) (step 076IWS621) ), the CPU 120 for effect control sets the confirmation command reception flag according to the received symbol confirmation designation command (step 076IWS622). For example, when the first symbol confirmation designation command is received, the first confirmation command reception flag is set. Further, for example, when the second symbol confirmation designation command is received, the second confirmation command reception flag is set. Further, for example, when the first compulsory symbol confirmation designation command is received, the first compulsory confirmation command reception flag is set. Further, for example, when the second forced symbol confirmation designation command is received, the second forced confirmation command reception flag is set.

If the received production control command is the big hit start designation command (step 076IWS623), the production control CPU 120 performs control to start displaying right-handed display on the display screen of the image display device 5 (step 076IWS624). Further, the effect control CPU 120 sets a big hit start designation command reception flag (step 076IWS625).

If the received effect control command is the big hit end designation command (step 076IWS626), the effect control CPU 120 performs control to end the right-handed display on the display screen of the image display device 5 (step 076IWS627). Further, the effect control CPU 120 sets a big hit end designation command reception flag (step 076IWS628).

In this example, the right hit display is displayed on the display screen of the image display device 5 during the big hit game by executing the processing of steps 076IWS624 and S627.

It should be noted that, for example, by changing the display mode (for example, display color) of the right-handed display that is displayed during the big hit game, a set value suggesting effect that suggests the current set value may be executed. For example, when right-handed display is started in step 076IWS624, normally, right-handed display of a white display color is started, whereas when the execution of the set value suggestive effect is decided, the set value "1" If the set value is “2”, the right-handed display of the green display color is started at a relatively high rate. When the set value is "3", the right-handed display of the yellow display color is started at a relatively high rate, and when the set value is "4", the right display of the orange display color is started at a relatively high rate. When the set value is "5", the hitting display is started at a relatively high rate. When the set value is "6", the right hitting display is started at a relatively high rate. The right-handed display of the rainbow display color may be started.

Further, for example, the right hit display is configured to be continuously executed even during the KT state after the big hit game is finished, and the display mode (for example, display color) of the right hit display is changed and set at the timing of the big hit game end. You may comprise so that a value suggestion production may be performed.

Further, for example, when the variable display is completed 50 times in the low-probability/first KT state and the normal state (low-probability/low-base state) is entered, the left-handed display is started, and the left-handed display is started. The display mode (for example, display color) of the display may be changed to execute the set value suggestion effect. Thus, when the control of the game state is switched in some form, the set value suggestion effect may be configured to be executable.

If the received effect control command is the small hit start designation command (step 076IWS629), the effect control CPU 120 sets the small hit start designation command reception flag (step 076IWS630).

If the received production control command is the small hit end designation command (step 076IWS631), the effect control CPU 120 sets the small hit end designation command reception flag (step 076IWS632).

If the received production control command is the big winning opening opening display command (step 076IWS633), the production control CPU 120 counts the number of winning game balls that have won the big winning opening during the big hit game round. The value of the counter is reset (cleared to 0) (step 076IWS634). Moreover, the CPU 120 for effect control sets a big winning opening open flag that specifies that the big winning opening is open (that is, a round period during a big hit game) (step 076IWS635).

In this example, the process of step 076IWS634 is executed, so that the value of the winning number counter is cleared to 0 at the timing of receiving the display command during the opening of the special winning opening (the timing of starting the round). Even when an over-winning prize is detected during the interval period after the end of the round period, the value is counted in the winning number counter.

If the received effect control command is a display command after opening the special winning opening (step 076IWS636), the CPU 120 for effect control sets a flag after opening the special winning opening that specifies the interval period after opening the special winning opening. (Step 076IWS637).

If the received production control command is a right-handed lighting start designation command (step 076IWS638), the production control CPU 120 performs control to start lighting the right-handed notification LED 37 (step 076IWS639).

If the received production control command is a right-handed lighting end designation command (step 076IWS640), the production control CPU 120 performs control to end the lighting of the right-handed notification LED 37 (step 076IWS641).

If the received production control command is a low-accuracy/non-KT background designation command (step 076IWS642), the production control CPU 120 sets the background image in the image display device 5 to a background image corresponding to the low probability/non-KT state (for example, Display control is performed with a blue background image) (step 076IWS643). Further, the effect control CPU 120, if set, resets the first KT state flag indicating the first KT state (step 076IWS644). Also, the effect control CPU 120 counts the cumulative number of award balls paid out based on winning in the special winning opening and the special winning opening during the big hit game and the high probability/second KT state. If the sphere number counter is set, the value of the prize sphere number counter is reset (cleared to 0) (step 076IWS645).

In this example, during the big hit game (excluding the 2R certainty variation big hit and the big hit game based on the 2R regular big hit), a game ball is won in the big winning opening, or a special winning opening is played during the high probability/second KT state. The value of the prize ball number counter is cumulatively updated when a ball is won (see steps 076IWS660 and S667), but by executing the process of step 076IWS645, the gaming state has a low probability/ The value of the prize ball number counter is cleared to 0 when the variable display is completed 50 times after the high base state (low probability/first KT state) and the low probability/low base state is entered.

If the received effect control command is a low-accuracy/first KT background designating command (step 076IWS646), the effect control CPU 120 sets the background image in the image display device 5 to a low probability/background image corresponding to the first KT state (for example, The display is controlled with a green background image) (step 076IWS647). Moreover, the CPU 120 for effect control sets the first KT state flag (step 076IWS648) and, if set, the high-probability state flag indicating the high-probability state, and the second probability indicating the second KT state. The 2KT status flag is reset (step 076IWS649).

If the received effect control command is the high-accuracy/first KT background designating command (step 076IWS650), the effect control CPU 120 sets the background image in the image display device 5 to a high probability/background image corresponding to the first KT state (for example, Display control is performed with a yellow background image) (step 076IWS651). Moreover, the CPU 120 for effect control sets the high-probability state flag and the first KT state flag (step 076IWS652), and resets the second KT state flag if set (step 076IWS653).

If the received effect control command is the high-accuracy/second KT background designating command (step 076IWS654), the effect control CPU 120 sets the background image in the image display device 5 to the background image corresponding to the high probability/second KT state (for example, The display is controlled with a red background image) (step 076IWS655). Moreover, the CPU 120 for effect control sets the high-probability state flag and the second KT state flag (step 076IWS656), and resets the first KT state flag if set (step 076IWS657).

If the received production control command is a special winning opening winning award designation command (step 076IWS658), the production control CPU 120 confirms whether or not it is a big hit game based on 10R certainty jackpot, 6R certainty jackpot, or 6R regular jackpot. (Step 076IWS659). Whether or not the big hit game based on the 10R certainty variation big hit, the 6R certainty variation big hit, or the 6R normal big jackpot is being played, for example, the value of the effect control process flag is the big hit medium effect processing (step S176) to ending effect processing (step S177). ) Is displayed, and whether the display result specification commands stored in the display result specification command storage area are display result 2 specification command to display result 4 specification command It can be determined by

During the big hit game based on the 10R sure change big hit, the 6R sure change big hit, or the 6R normal big hit, the effect control CPU 120 adds 15 to the value of the prize ball number counter (step 076IWS660). Further, the effect control CPU 120 updates the prize ball number display displayed on the image display device 5 based on the value of the prize ball number counter after the addition (step 076IWS661). The prize ball number display is a display of the cumulative number of prize balls paid out based on winning in the special winning opening and the special winning opening during the big hit game and the high probability/second KT state.

By executing the processing of steps 076IWS658 to S661, in the present example, a prize ball is generated on the basis of the fact that a winning at the special winning opening occurs during a big hit game based on a 10R certainty jackpot, a 6R certainty jackpot, or a 6R regular jackpot. The value of the number counter and the prize ball number display are updated. On the other hand, even during a big hit game, if a winning in the special winning opening occurs during the big hit game based on the 2R probability variation big hit or the 2R normal big hit, the value of the prize ball number counter is not updated, and the prize ball The number display is not updated either.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 executes an over-winning suggestion effect process for determining and executing an over-winning suggestion effect (step 076IWS662). In addition, the "over-winning suggestion effect" is an effect that is executed at a timing when an over-winning to the special winning opening occurs and suggests a set value that is currently set.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 executes the prize sphere number display suggestion effect process for determining and executing the prize sphere number indication suggestion effect (step 076IWS663). In addition, "the prize ball number indication suggestion effect" is a predetermined cumulative number of prize balls paid out based on winning at the special winning opening or the special winning opening during the big hit game or the high probability/second KT state. This is an effect that is executed at a timing when the number (456 pieces, 555 pieces, 666 pieces, 2456 pieces, 2555 pieces, 2666 pieces) in this example is reached, and suggests the set value that is currently set.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 executes the prize sphere number emphasis effect process for determining and executing the prize sphere number emphasis effect (step 076IWS664). The "award ball number enhancement effect" is the cumulative number of award balls paid out based on the fact that the player has won the special winning opening or the special winning opening during the big hit game or the high probability/second KT state. (In this example, 1000, 2000, 3000, 4000, 5000) is an effect that is highlighted.

If the received effect control command is the special winning award winning designation command (step 076IWS665), the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the second KT state flag is set (step 076IWS666). If the second KT state flag is set (that is, in the high probability/second KT state), the effect control CPU 120 adds 10 to the value of the prize ball counter (step 076IWS667). Further, the effect control CPU 120 updates the award ball number display displayed on the image display device 5 based on the value of the award ball number counter after the addition (step 076IWS668).

By executing the processing of steps 076IWS665 to S668, in the present example, the value of the prize ball number counter and the prize balls are determined based on the fact that a small hit occurs during the high probability/second KT state and a prize is won in the special winning opening. The number display is updated. On the other hand, even in the KT state, if a special prize is won during the high probability/first KT state or the low probability/first KT state, the value of the prize ball number counter is not updated, The number of prize balls display is not updated (however, the value of the prize ball counter is not updated, and the value of the prize ball counter is not reset).

Next, the effect control CPU 120 executes a small hit prize suggestion effect process for determining and executing a small hit prize suggestion effect (step 076IWS669). The "small hit winning suggestion effect" is an effect that is executed at a timing when a small hit occurs in the high probability/second KT state and a special winning opening is won, and suggests the currently set setting value. ..

Next, the effect control CPU 120 moves to step 076IWS663 and executes the award ball number display suggesting effect process (step 076IWS663). Next, the effect control CPU 120 executes prize ball number emphasis effect processing (step 076IWS664).

If the received effect control command is any of the symbol designating commands (step 076IWS670), the effect control CPU 120 sends the received symbol designating command to the empty first space in the start winning command storage area formed in the RAM 122. (Step 076IWS671).

If the received production control command is any variation category command (step 076IWS672), the production control CPU 120 stores the received variation category command in the storage area of the start winning command storage area formed in the RAM 122. The latest symbol designating command is stored in the storage area (step 076IWS673).

If the received effect control command is the first effective start prize designation command or the second effective start prize designation command (step 076IWS674), the effect control CPU 120 receives the first effective start prize designation command or the second effective start prize. The designated command is stored in the storage area in which the latest symbol designating command and the variation category command are stored among the storage areas of the start winning command storage area formed in the RAM 122 (step 076IWS675).

By executing the processing of steps 076IWS670 to S675, in the present example, when the start winning is generated, in the start winning command storage area, the symbol designating command, the variation category command, and the valid starting winning designating command (first valid starting) The winning designation command and the second effective start winning designation command) are stored in association with each other.

A first start-up winning command storage area corresponding to the first reserved memory and a second start-winning command storage area corresponding to the second reserved memory may be separately provided. Then, in this case, in the first start winning command storage area, the symbol designating command, the variation category command, and the first effective starting winning designation command are stored in association with each other, and in the second starting winning command storage area, the symbol designation The command, the variation category command, and the second effective start winning award designation command may be stored in association with each other.

If the received effect control command is any other command, the effect control CPU 120 executes a process of storing the received effect control command or setting a flag according to the received effect control command (step 076IWS676). ). Then, the process proceeds to step 076IWS611.

(Suggestive production process when winning over)
FIG. 9-28 is a flowchart of the over-winning suggestion production process (step 076IWS662). In the over-prize suggestion process, the effect control CPU 120 first adds 1 to the value of the winning number counter (step 076IWS301). Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the value of the winning number counter after addition is 11 or more (step 076IWS302). If the value of the winning number counter is 11 or more (that is, if an over-winning to the big winning opening has occurred), the effect control CPU 120 determines the presence and type of the over-winning suggested effect. Using the over-winning suggestion effect determination table, a lottery process is performed based on a random number to determine the presence and type of the over-winning suggestion effect (step 076IWS303).

FIG. 9-29 is an illustration of a specific example of the over-winning suggestion effect determination table. As shown in FIG. 9-29, in the over-winning suggestion effect determination table, there is no over-winning suggestion effect, over-winning suggestion effect A, over-winning suggestion effect B, over-winning suggestion effect C, and over-winning suggestion. A determination value is assigned to each of the suggestion effect D, the over-winning suggestion effect E, and the over-winning suggestion effect F.

As shown in FIG. 9-29, in this example, when a game ball is won in the special winning opening, a prize display (in this example, “+15” in the normal display color (white in this example)) is displayed on the image display device 5. Character display) is displayed and the normal winning sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 9-29, when the “over prize winning suggestion effect A” is executed, the winning display is displayed in the blue display color on the image display device 5 and the speaker 8L is displayed. , 8R outputs a winning sound of a sound A different from the normal sound. Further, when the “over-winning suggestion effect B” is executed, the winning display is displayed in the green display color on the image display device 5 and the winning of the sound B different from the normal sound from the speakers 8L and 8R is performed. Sound is output. Further, when the "over-winning suggestion effect C" is executed, the winning display is displayed in a yellow display color on the image display device 5 and the winning of the sound C different from the normal sound from the speakers 8L and 8R. Sound is output. Further, when the "over prize winning suggestion effect D" is executed, the winning display is displayed in the orange display color on the image display device 5 and the sound D different from the normal sound is won from the speakers 8L and 8R. Sound is output. When the “over-winning suggestion effect E” is executed, the winning display is displayed in a red display color on the image display device 5 and the sound E different from the normal sound is won from the speakers 8L and 8R. Sound is output. When the “over-winning suggestion effect F” is executed, the winning display is displayed in the rainbow display color on the image display device 5 and the sound F different from the normal sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R. The winning sound is output.

As shown in FIG. 9-29, in the over-winning suggestion effect determination table, different determination values are assigned depending on which of the setting values “1” to “6” the current setting value is. In step 076IWS303, the effect control CPU 120 confirms the stored contents of the setting value storage area (see step 076IWS615) and specifies the current setting value. Then, the presence or absence and the type of the over-winning suggestion effect are determined based on the determination value corresponding to the specified setting value.

As shown in FIG. 9-29, in the present example, when the set value is “1”, the rate at which execution of the over-winning suggestion effect A is determined is relatively high. Further, in the present example, when the set value is “2”, the rate at which execution of the over-winning suggestion effect B is determined is relatively high. Further, in the present example, when the set value is “3”, the rate at which execution of the over-winning suggestion effect C is determined is relatively high. Further, in the present example, when the set value is "4", the rate at which execution of the over-winning suggestion effect D is determined is relatively high. In addition, in the present example, when the set value is "5", the rate at which execution of the over-winning suggestion effect E is determined is relatively high. In addition, in the present example, when the set value is “6”, the rate at which execution of the over-winning suggestion effect F is determined is relatively high.

Further, as shown in FIG. 9-29, in the present example, when the setting value is “1”, the ratio of determining the execution of the over-winning time suggestive effect, which is the total of the over-winning time suggestive effects A to F, is determined as follows. 10%+8%+7%+5%+5%+5%=40%, 45% when the set value is “2”, 50% when the set value is “3”, and the set value When it is “4”, it is 55%, when it is the setting value “5”, it is 60%, and when it is the setting value “6”, it is 65%. As described above, in the present example, the over-winning occurs relatively rarely, so the ratio of determining execution of the over-winning suggesting effect becomes relatively high as compared with the small hit winning suggesting effect described later. There is.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the execution of the over-winning time suggestion effect is determined in step 076IWS303 (step 076IWS304). If the execution of the over-winning suggestion effect has been determined, the effect control CPU 120 performs control to display a winning display according to the determined over-winning suggestion effect type on the image display device 5 (step 076IWS305). .. For example, when it is determined to execute the over-winning suggestion effect A, the image display device 5 is controlled to display the winning display in a blue display color. Further, the effect control CPU 120 controls the speakers 8L and 8R to output the winning sound according to the determined type of the over-winning suggestion effect (step 076IWS306). For example, when it is determined to execute the over-winning suggestion effect A, control is performed to output the winning sound of the sound A from the speakers 8L and 8R.

On the other hand, when the value of the winning number counter is 10 or less (N in step 076IWS302) or when it is determined that there is no over-winning suggestion effect (N in step 076IWS304), the effect control CPU 120 causes the image display device 5 to operate. In, the control for displaying the winning display in the normal display color (white in this example) is performed (step 076IWS307). In addition, the effect control CPU 120 performs control to output the normal winning sound from the speakers 8L and 8R (step 076IWS308).

(Small prize winning suggestion processing)
FIG. 9-30 is a flowchart showing a small hit winning suggestion effect process (step 076IWS669). In the small hit winning suggestion effect process, the effect control CPU 120 first performs a lottery process based on a random number using a small hit winning suggestion effect determination table for determining the presence and type of the small hit prize suggesting effect. Then, the presence or absence of a small hit winning suggestion effect and the type are determined (step 076IWS321).

FIG. 9-31 is an explanatory view showing a specific example of the suggestion determination table upon winning the small hit prize. As shown in FIG. 9-31, in the small hit winning suggestive effect determination table, there is no small hit winning suggestive effect, small hit winning suggestive effect A, small hit winning suggestive effect B, small hit winning suggestive effect. A determination value is assigned to each of C, a small hit winning suggestion effect D, a small hit winning suggestion effect E, and a small hit winning suggestion effect F.

As shown in FIG. 9-31, in this example, when the game ball is won in the special winning opening, the image display device 5 displays the prize in the normal display color (white in this example) (“+10” in this example). Character display) is displayed and the normal winning sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 9-31, when the “small hitting winning suggestion effect A” is executed, the winning display is displayed in the blue display color on the image display device 5 and the speaker is displayed. The winning sound of the sound A different from the normal sound is output from 8L and 8R. When the “small hit prize suggestion effect B” is executed, the prize display is displayed in the green display color on the image display device 5 and the sound B different from the normal sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R. The winning sound is output. When the “small hit winning suggestion C” is executed, the winning display is displayed in the image display device 5 in a yellow display color and the sound C different from the normal sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R. The winning sound is output. Further, when the "small hit winning suggestion effect D" is executed, the winning display is displayed in the orange display color on the image display device 5 and the sound D different from the normal sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R. The winning sound is output. When the “small hit winning suggestion effect E” is executed, the winning display is displayed in a red display color on the image display device 5 and the sound E different from the normal sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R. The winning sound is output. When the “small hit prize suggestion effect F” is executed, the prize display is displayed in the rainbow display color on the image display device 5, and the sound F different from the normal sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R. The winning sound of is output.

As shown in FIG. 9-31, different determination values are assigned to the small hit winning suggestion effect determination table depending on which of the set values “1” to “6” the current set value is. .. In step 076IWS321, the effect control CPU 120 confirms the stored contents of the set value storage area (see step 076IWS615) and specifies the current set value. Then, based on the determined value corresponding to the specified setting value, the presence or absence and the type of the small hit winning suggestion effect are determined.

As shown in FIG. 9-31, in the present example, when the setting value is “1”, the proportion of the execution of the small hit winning suggestion effect A being determined is relatively high. Further, in the present example, when the set value is "2", the proportion of the execution of the small hit winning suggestion effect B being determined is relatively high. Further, in the present example, when the set value is "3", the proportion of the execution of the small hit winning suggestion effect C determined is relatively high. In addition, in the present example, when the set value is "4", the percentage of the execution of the small hit winning suggestion effect D determined is relatively high. Further, in the present example, when the set value is "5", the proportion of the execution of the small hit winning suggestion effect E determined is relatively high. Further, in the present example, when the set value is "6", the proportion of the execution of the small hit winning suggestion effect F being determined is relatively high.

Further, as shown in FIG. 9-31, in the present example, when the setting value is “1”, the proportion of determining the execution of the small hitting prize suggestive effect which is the sum of the small hit prize suggesting effects A to F Is 2%+1%+1%+1%=5%, 6% when the set value is “2”, 7% when the set value is “3”, and the set value is “4”. Is 8%, the setting value is “5”, it is 9%, and the setting value is “6”, it is 10%. As described above, in this example, as compared with the above-described over-winning time suggestive effect, the rate of determining execution of the small hit winning time suggestive effect is relatively low.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not it has been decided to execute the small hit winning suggestion effect in step 076IWS321 (step 076IWS322). If the execution of the small hit winning suggestion effect is determined, the effect control CPU 120 controls the image display device 5 to display the winning display according to the determined type of the small hit prize suggesting effect (step). 076IWS323). For example, when the execution of the small hit winning suggestion effect A is determined, the image display device 5 is controlled to display the winning display in a blue display color. Further, the effect control CPU 120 controls the speakers 8L and 8R to output the winning sound according to the determined type of the small hit winning suggestion effect (step 076IWS324). For example, when the execution of the small hit winning suggestion effect A is decided, the speaker 8L, 8R is controlled to output the winning sound of the sound A.

On the other hand, when it is determined that there is no suggestion effect at the time of winning the small hit (N in step 076IWS322), the effect control CPU 120 displays the prize display in the normal display color (white in this example) on the image display device 5. Control is performed (step 076IWS325). Further, the effect control CPU 120 performs control to output the normal winning sound from the speakers 8L and 8R (step 076IWS326).

The reliability of the set value suggestion may be different between when the over-winning suggestion effect is executed and when the small hit winning suggestion effect is executed. For example, the over-winning suggestion effect F can be executed with any of the set values “1” to “6”, but is executed at a relatively high rate when the set value is “6”, whereas the small hit It may be configured to determine that the set value is “6” when the prize suggestion effect F is executed. On the other hand, on the contrary, for example, the small hit winning suggestion effect F can be executed with any of the set values “1” to “6”, but is executed at a relatively high rate when the set value is “6”. On the other hand, if the over-winning suggestion effect F is executed, it may be determined that the set value is “6”.

Further, in this example, the over-winning suggestion effect and the small hit winning suggestion effect cause the display mode of the prize display (in this example, the display color) to be different from the normal one, and output a different winning sound from the normal one. Although the case is shown where it is executed according to an aspect, it is not limited to such an aspect. For example, by making only one of the display mode (display color in this example) of the prize display and the winning sound different from the normal mode, the over-winning suggestion effect or the small hit winning suggestion effect is executed. It may be configured as follows. Also, for example, by displaying the effect display at the timing of the occurrence of over-winning or the occurrence of winning in the special winning opening, or by changing the display color of the lamp or LED, suggestive effects at the time of over-winning and small hit prizes The time suggestion effect may be configured to be executed.

(Award ball number indication suggestion processing)
FIG. 9-32 is a flowchart showing the prize sphere number display suggesting effect process (step 076IWS663). In the prize sphere number display suggesting effect process, the effect control CPU 120 first confirms whether or not the value of the prize sphere number counter first reaches 456 (step 076IWS341). In this example, if a game ball is won in the special winning opening during the big hit game, 15 prize balls are obtained, and the value of the prize ball number counter is incremented by 15. Therefore, in step 076IWS341, the effect control is performed. If the value of the prize ball counter is 465, the CPU 120 determines that the value of the prize ball counter has reached 456 first.

If the value of the prize ball number counter has reached 456 first, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the current set value is equal to or larger than the set value “4” (step 076IWS342). It should be noted that whether or not the current set value is equal to or larger than the set value “4” can be specifically determined by checking the stored contents of the set value storage area (see step 076IWS615). If the current set value is equal to or larger than the set value “4”, the effect control CPU 120 uses the prize ball number display suggestion effect determination table for determining the presence or absence of the prize ball number display suggestion effect, and the lottery based on the random number. Processing is performed to determine the presence or absence of the prize ball number display suggestive effect A (step 076IWS343). Then, the process proceeds to step 076IWS359.

FIG. 9-33 is an explanatory view showing a specific example of the prize sphere number display suggestive effect determination table. As shown in FIG. 9-33, in this example, when the prize ball number display suggesting effect A is executed, a character display such as “456 OVER” is displayed on the image display device 5, and the current set value is It is suggested that the set value is “4” or more. As shown in FIG. 9-33, in this example, the execution of the award ball number display suggestive effect A is determined with a probability of 3%. In this example, since the prize sphere number display suggestive effect A is executed only when the set value is equal to or more than the set value “4”, if the prize sphere number suggestive effect A is executed, at least the set value “4” is set. It will be decided that it is above.

If the value of the prize ball number counter does not reach 456 first (N in step 076IWS341), the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the value of the prize ball number counter first reaches 555 ( Step 076 IWS344). In this example, if a game ball wins the special winning opening during the big hit game, 15 prize balls are obtained, and the value of the prize ball number counter is incremented by 15. Therefore, in step 076IWS344, the effect control is performed. If the value of the prize ball number counter is 555, the CPU 120 determines that the value of the prize ball number counter has reached 555 first.

If the value of the prize ball counter reaches 555 for the first time, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the current setting value is the setting value “5” or more (step 076IWS345). It should be noted that whether or not the current set value is equal to or larger than the set value “5” can be specifically determined by checking the stored contents of the set value storage area (see step 076IWS615). If the current set value is greater than or equal to the set value “5”, the effect control CPU 120 performs a lottery process based on a random number by using the prize ball number indication suggestion effect determination table, and determines whether or not there is the prize ball number indication suggestion effect B. Is determined (step 076IWS346). Then, the process proceeds to step 076IWS359.

As shown in FIG. 9-33, in this example, when the prize ball number display suggesting effect B is executed, a character display such as “555 OVER” is displayed on the image display device 5, and the current set value is It is suggested that the setting value is “5” or more. As shown in FIG. 9-33, in this example, the execution of the prize ball number display suggestive effect B is determined with a probability of 2%. In this example, the prize sphere number display suggestive effect B is executed only when the set value is equal to or more than the set value “5”. Therefore, if the prize sphere number display suggestive effect B is executed, at least the set value “5” is set. It will be decided that it is above.

If the value of the prize ball number counter does not reach 555 first (N in step 076IWS344), the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether the value of the prize ball number counter first reaches 666 ( Step 076IWS347). In this example, if a game ball is won in the special winning opening during the big hit game, 15 prize balls are obtained, and the value of the prize ball number counter is incremented by 15. Therefore, in step 076IWS347, the effect control is performed. If the value of the prize ball counter is 675, the CPU 120 determines that the value of the prize ball counter has reached 666 first.

If the value of the prize ball number counter reaches 666 first, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the current setting value is the setting value “6” (step 076IWS348). It should be noted that whether or not the current setting value is the setting value “6” can be specifically determined by checking the stored contents of the setting value storage area (see step 076IWS615). If the current set value is the set value "6", the effect control CPU 120 performs a lottery process based on a random number by using the prize ball number display suggestion effect determination table and determines whether or not the prize ball number indication suggestion effect C is present. It is determined (step 076IWS349). Then, the process proceeds to step 076IWS359.

As shown in FIG. 9-33, in this example, when the prize ball number display suggesting effect C is executed, a character display such as “666 OVER” is displayed on the image display device 5, and the current set value is It is suggested that the setting value is “6”. As shown in FIG. 9-33, in this example, the execution of the prize ball number display suggestive effect C is determined with a probability of 1%. In this example, the prize sphere number display suggestive effect C is executed only when the set value is the set value “6”, so if the prize sphere number display suggestive effect C is executed, the set value is “6”. It will be confirmed that there is.

Unless the value of the prize ball counter reaches 666 first (N in step 076IWS347), the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the value of the prize ball counter first reaches 2456 ( Step 076 IWS350). In this example, 15 award balls are obtained if a game ball is won in the special winning opening during the big hit game, and 10 award balls if the game ball is won in the special winning opening during the high probability/second KT state. Is obtained, and the value of the prize ball number counter is incremented by 15 or 10, so in step 076IWS350, the effect control CPU 120 determines that the prize ball number counter value is 2460 or 2465. It is determined that the value of the number counter reaches 2456 first.

If the value of the prize ball number counter has reached 2456 for the first time, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the current setting value is the setting value “4” or more (step 076IWS351). It should be noted that whether or not the current set value is equal to or larger than the set value “4” can be specifically determined by checking the stored contents of the set value storage area (see step 076IWS615). If the current set value is greater than or equal to the set value “4”, the effect control CPU 120 performs lottery processing based on a random number by using the prize ball number display suggestion effect determination table, and whether or not the prize ball number suggestion effect D is present. Is determined (step 076IWS352). Then, the process proceeds to step 076IWS359.

As shown in FIG. 9-33, in the present example, when the prize ball number display suggesting effect D is executed, a character display such as “2456 OVER” is displayed on the image display device 5, and the current set value is It is suggested that the set value is “4” or more. As shown in FIG. 9-33, in this example, the execution of the prize ball number display suggestive effect D is determined with a probability of 5%. In addition, in this example, the prize sphere number display suggestive effect D is executed only when the set value is equal to or more than the set value "4". Therefore, if the prize sphere number indication suggestive effect D is executed, the set value "4". It is confirmed that the above is done.

If the value of the prize ball number counter does not reach 2456 first (N of step 076IWS350), the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the value of the prize ball number counter first reaches 2555 ( Step 076IWS353). In this example, 15 award balls are obtained if a game ball is won in the special winning opening during the big hit game, and 10 award balls if the game ball is won in the special winning opening during the high probability/second KT state. Is obtained, and the value of the prize ball number counter is incremented by 15 or 10, so in step 076IWS353, if the value of the prize ball number counter is 2555 or 2560, the effect control CPU 120 determines that the prize ball is a prize ball. It is determined that the value of the number counter reaches 2555 first.

If the value of the prize ball number counter has reached 2555 first, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the current setting value is the setting value “5” or more (step 076IWS354). It should be noted that whether or not the current set value is equal to or larger than the set value “5” can be specifically determined by checking the stored contents of the set value storage area (see step 076IWS615). If the current set value is greater than or equal to the set value “5”, the effect control CPU 120 performs a lottery process based on a random number using the award ball display indication effect determination table to determine whether the award ball number indication effect E is present. Is determined (step 076IWS355). Then, the process proceeds to step 076IWS359.

As shown in FIG. 9-33, in the present example, when the prize ball number display suggesting effect E is executed, a character display such as “2555 OVER” is displayed on the image display device 5, and the current set value is It is suggested that the setting value is “5” or more. As shown in FIG. 9-33, in this example, the execution of the prize ball number display suggestive effect E is determined with a probability of 3%. In this example, the prize sphere number display suggestive effect E is executed only when the set value is equal to or more than the set value "5". Therefore, if the prize sphere number display suggestive effect E is executed, the set value "5" is set. It is confirmed that the above is done.

If the value of the prize ball number counter does not reach 2555 first (N in step 076IWS353), the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the value of the prize ball number counter first reaches 2666 ( Step 076IWS356). In this example, 15 award balls are obtained if a game ball is won in the special winning opening during the big hit game, and 10 award balls if the game ball is won in the special winning opening during the high probability/second KT state. Is obtained, and the value of the prize ball number counter is incremented by 15 or 10, so in step 076IWS356, if the value of the prize ball number counter is 2670 or 2675, the effect control CPU 120 determines It is determined that the value of the number counter reaches 2666 first.

If the value of the prize ball counter reaches 2666 first, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the current setting value is the setting value “6” (step 076IWS357). It should be noted that whether or not the current setting value is the setting value “6” can be specifically determined by checking the stored contents of the setting value storage area (see step 076IWS615). If the current set value is the set value "6", the effect control CPU 120 performs lottery processing based on a random number by using the prize ball number display suggestion effect determination table, and determines whether or not the prize ball number suggestion effect F is present. It is determined (step 076IWS358). Then, the process proceeds to step 076IWS359.

As shown in FIG. 9-33, in this example, when the award ball number display suggesting effect F is executed, a character display such as “2666 OVER” is displayed on the image display device 5, and the current set value is It is suggested that the setting value is “6”. As shown in FIG. 9-33, in this example, the execution of the prize ball number display suggestive effect F is determined with a probability of 2%. In this example, the prize sphere number display suggestive effect F is executed only when the set value is the set value “6”. It will be confirmed that there is.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not it has been decided to execute the award number indication suggestion effect in steps 076IWS343, S346, S349, S352, S355, S358 (step 076IWS359). If the execution of the prize sphere number display suggestion effect is determined, the effect control CPU 120 controls the image display device 5 to execute the determined type of prize sphere number display suggestion effect (step 076IWS360). For example, if it is decided to execute the prize ball number display suggestion effect A, the image display device 5 is controlled to display a character display such as “456 OVER”.

In this example, as shown in FIG. 9-33, when viewing the prize ball number indication suggestive effects A to C executed during the big hit game, the period during the big hit game becomes longer and the number of prize balls increases. As a result, the execution probability of the award ball number indication suggestion effect decreases to 3%, 2%, and 1%, while the setting value “4” or more is determined, the setting value “5” or more is determined, and the setting value “ 6” Accuracy of confirmation and suggestion of set value is increasing. Further, in this example, as shown in FIG. 9-33, when viewed in the award ball number display suggestive effects D to F executed during the high probability/second KT state (small hit RUSH), the small hit RUSH is As the number of award balls increases and the number of award balls increases, the execution probability of the award number indication suggestion effect decreases to 5%, 3%, and 2%, while the set value "4" or more is confirmed The accuracy of confirming "5" or more and confirming the setting value "6" and setting value is increasing.

In addition to the aspect shown in this example, for example, as the period during the big hit game or the period during the small hit RUSH becomes longer and the number of prize balls increases, the probability of executing the prize ball number display suggestive effect becomes higher. It may be configured to go. Further, for example, the precision of suggesting the set value may be lowered as the period during the big hit game or the period during the small hit RUSH increases and the number of prize balls increases.

Further, in this example, as shown in FIG. 9-33, the prize ball number display suggestion effects A to C executed during the period of the big hit game and the prize ball number display suggestion executed during the period of the small hit RUSH. The case where the execution probabilities of the prize sphere number display suggesting effects are different from the effects D to F is shown, but the present invention is not limited to such an aspect, and the prize ball number display suggesting effects are configured to be executed with the same execution probability. May be.

(Awards ball number emphasis production process)
FIG. 9-34 is a flowchart showing the prize ball number enhancement effect process (step 076IWS664). In the prize ball number enhancement effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the value of the prize ball number counter first reaches the threshold value for each 1000 (in this example, 1000, 2000, 3000, 4000, 5000). Is confirmed (step 076IWS371). In this example, if a game ball wins the special winning opening during a big hit game, 15 prize balls are obtained, and the value of the prize ball number counter is incremented by 15. Therefore, in step 076IWS371, the effect control is performed. For example, if the value of the prize ball counter is 1000 or 1005, the CPU 120 determines that the value of the prize ball counter has reached 1000 first. Further, for example, if the value of the prize ball counter is 2000 or 2005, it is determined that the value of the prize ball counter has reached 2000 first. Further, for example, if the value of the prize ball counter is 3000 or 3005, it is determined that the value of the prize ball counter reaches 3000 first. Further, for example, if the value of the prize ball counter is 4000 or 4005, it is determined that the value of the prize ball counter has reached 4000 first. Further, for example, if the value of the prize ball counter is 5000 or 5005, it is determined that the value of the prize ball counter reaches 5000 first.

If the value of the prize ball number counter reaches the threshold value for each 1000 first, the effect control CPU 120 uses the prize ball number emphasis effect determination table for determining the presence or absence of the prize ball number emphasis effect, and generates a random number. A lottery process based on the above is performed to determine the presence or absence of the award ball emphasis effect (step 076IWS372).

FIG. 9-35 is an explanatory diagram of a specific example of the award ball number emphasis effect determination table. As shown in FIG. 9-35, in the present example, when the value of the prize ball number counter reaches 1000, the execution of the prize ball number emphasis effect A is determined with a probability of 50%. When the prize ball number enhancement effect A is executed, a character display such as “1000 OVER” is displayed on the image display device 5. In addition, in this example, when the value of the prize ball number counter reaches 2000, the execution of the prize ball number emphasizing effect B is determined with a probability of 60%. When the prize sphere emphasis effect B is executed, a character display such as “2000 OVER” is displayed on the image display device 5. In addition, in the present example, when the value of the prize ball number counter reaches 3000, the execution of the prize ball number emphasizing effect C is determined with a probability of 70%. When the prize ball number enhancement effect C is executed, a character display such as “3000 OVER” is displayed on the image display device 5. Further, in the present example, when the value of the prize ball number counter reaches 4000, the execution of the prize ball number emphasizing effect D is determined with a probability of 80%. When the prize ball number emphasis effect D is executed, a character display such as “4000 OVER” is displayed on the image display device 5. Further, in this example, when the value of the prize ball number counter reaches 5000, the execution of the prize ball number emphasizing effect E is determined with a probability of 90%. When the prize ball number emphasis effect E is executed, a character display such as “5000 OVER” is displayed on the image display device 5.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the execution of the award ball number emphasis effect is determined in step 076IWS372 (step 076IWS373). If the execution of the prize sphere number emphasis effect has been decided, the effect control CPU 120 controls the image display device 5 to execute the decided type of prize sphere number emphasis effect (step 076IWS374). For example, when it is determined to execute the prize ball number emphasizing effect A, the image display device 5 is controlled to display a character display such as “1000 OVER”.

In addition, in this example, the case where the award ball number emphasizing effect is configured to be executable when the number of award balls reaches 1000, 2000, 3000, 4000, and 5000 has been described. It is not limited to the mode. For example, not only in the case where the prize ball number emphasizing effect can be executed in all of these cases, the prize ball number emphasizing effect can be executed when the number of prize balls reaches 1,000, 2000, and 3000. You may comprise. Further, for example, when the number of prize balls reaches 6000 or 7000, the prize ball number emphasis effect may be configured to be executable, and various modes are possible.

As shown in FIGS. 9-34 and 9-35, the prize sphere number emphasis effect is irrelevant to the current set value, unlike the prize sphere number display suggestion effect shown in FIGS. 9-32 and 9-33. It is a performance that is decided and executed. It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to such a mode, and for example, by changing the display mode of the prize sphere number emphasis effect, the prize sphere number emphasis effect may be configured to be executable in a mode that suggests the current set value. For example, the present setting value may be suggested by displaying a character display such as "1000 OVER" or "2000 OVER" in a display color different from the normal display color.

(Variable display start wait processing)
FIG. 9-36 is a flowchart showing the variable display start waiting process (step S170). In the variable display start waiting process, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the variation pattern command is received (step 076IWS811). Whether or not the fluctuation pattern command is received is determined by, for example, in the command analysis process (step S75), when the fluctuation pattern command is received, a fluctuation pattern command reception flag indicating that the fluctuation pattern command is received is set. In step 076IWS811, it is only necessary to confirm whether or not the variation pattern command reception flag is set.

If the variation pattern command is received, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether the first KT state flag or the second KT state flag is set (step 076IWS812). If neither the first KT state flag nor the second KT state flag is set (that is, if it is a non-KT state), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the variable display of the first special symbol. Is confirmed (step 076IWS813). Whether or not the variation display of the first special symbol is executed is, for example, whether or not the variation pattern indicated by the received variation pattern command specifies the first variation pattern #01 to #09. It can be determined by confirming that. Unless the variable display of the first special symbol is executed (that is, when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed), the process is ended as it is. When performing the variable display of the first special symbol, the effect control CPU 120 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the variable display start setting process (step S171) (step 076IWS815).

If the 1st KT state flag or the 2nd KT state flag is not set (that is, if it is the KT state), the CPU 120 for effect control confirms whether or not it is the time to execute the variable display of the second special symbol. (Step 076 IWS814). Whether or not the variation display of the second special symbol is executed is, for example, whether or not the variation pattern indicated by the received variation pattern command specifies the second variation patterns #01 to #34. It can be determined by confirming that. Unless the variable display of the second special symbol is executed (that is, when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed), the process is ended as it is. When performing the variable display of the second special symbol, the CPU 120 for effect control updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the variable display start setting process (step S171) (step 076IWS815).

By performing the processing of steps 076IWS812 to S815, in the characteristic portion 076IW, in the non-KT state, the variable display of the decorative symbol is displayed in the image display device 5 in correspondence with the variable display of the first special symbol. When it is executed and in the KT state, the variable display of the decorative symbol is executed on the image display device 5 in correspondence with the variable display of the second special symbol. In other words, even when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed in the KT state, or when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed in the non-KT state, , The variable display of the decorative pattern is not executed.

(Variable display start setting process)
FIG. 9-37 is a flowchart showing the variable display start setting process (step S171). In the variable display start setting processing, the effect control CPU 120 first determines a stop symbol of the decorative symbol according to the variable display result (step 076IWS921). In step 076IWS921, the effect control CPU 120, when the display result 1 designation command is received (when it is determined to be off), only the out-of-left or left-right decorative patterns in which the left-middle-right decorative design does not match at all. Determine the combination of out-of-match reach patterns. When the display result 2 designation command is received (when it is determined to be the 10R probability variation big hit), the combination of symbols arranged in the symbol “7” among the odd left symbols is determined. In addition, when the display result 3 designation command is received (when it is determined that the 6R probability variation big hit), the combination of the symbols arranged in the odd-numbered symbols other than "7" is determined for the left middle right decorative symbol. Further, when the display result 5 designation command is received (when it is determined to be the 2R probability variation big hit), the combination of symbols including the special symbol (in this example, the symbol “R”) as the decorative symbol in the symbol is determined. .. Further, when the display result 4 designation command or the display result 6 designation command is received (when it is determined to be the 6R normal big hit or the 2R normal big hit), the combination of symbols in which the left middle right decorative pattern is arranged in an even number pattern To decide. Further, when the display result 7 designation command is received (when it is determined to be a small hit), the combination of the decorative designs of the small hit design (for example, "135") is determined.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the current variation display is out of order (step 076IWS922). It should be noted that whether or not the variable display this time is out of order is determined by, for example, checking whether or not the display result designation command stored in the display result designation command storage area is the display result 1 designation command. Can be determined by. If it is not a deviation change, the process directly proceeds to step 076IWS926. If it is a deviation variation (Y in step 076IWS922), the effect control CPU 120 executes the setting value suggestion effect setting process for determining the presence and type of the setting value suggestion effect that suggests the currently set setting value. (Step 076IWS923).

In step 076IWS923, the effect control CPU 120 identifies the setting value stored in the setting value storage area (see step 076IWS615). Then, the effect control CPU 120 performs a lottery process based on a random number by using a table corresponding to the specified setting value as a setting value suggestion effect determination table for determining the presence and type of the setting value suggestion effect, and the setting is performed. Determine the presence and type of value suggestion production.

FIG. 9-38 is an explanatory diagram for describing a specific example of the set value suggestive effect determination table. As shown in FIG. 9-38, in the set value suggestion effect determination table, there is no set value suggestion effect, set value suggestion effect A, set value suggestion effect B, set value suggestion effect C, set value suggestion effect D, and set value. A determination value is assigned to each of the suggestive effect E and the set value suggestive effect F.

The set value suggestive effect A is, for example, an effect executed in a mode in which a predetermined character image is displayed in a blue display color on the image display device 5, and as shown in FIG. 9-38, the set value is “1”. In some cases, the execution rate is highest. Further, the set value suggesting effect B is, for example, an effect executed in a mode in which a predetermined character image is displayed in the green display color on the image display device 5, and as shown in FIG. ", the highest execution rate. Further, the set value suggestive effect C is, for example, an effect executed in a mode in which a predetermined character image is displayed in a yellow display color on the image display device 5, and as shown in FIG. ", the highest execution rate. The set value suggestive effect D is, for example, an effect executed in a mode in which a predetermined character image is displayed in the orange display color on the image display device 5, and as shown in FIG. ", the highest execution rate. Further, the set value suggestive effect E is, for example, an effect executed in a mode in which a predetermined character image is displayed in a red display color on the image display device 5, and as shown in FIG. ", the highest execution rate. The set value suggestive effect F is, for example, an effect executed in a mode in which a predetermined character image is displayed in the rainbow display color on the image display device 5, and as shown in FIG. When it is "6", the execution ratio is highest.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the second KT state flag is set (step 076IWS924). If the second KT state flag is not set (that is, it is not the second KT state), the process directly proceeds to step 076IWS926. If the second KT state flag is set (Y in step 076IWS924), that is, if it is the second KT state, the effect control CPU 120 suggests that the second KT state (small hit RUSH) will continue. The small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect setting process for determining the presence and type of the continuation suggestion effect is executed (step 076IWS925).

FIG. 9-39 is an explanatory diagram for describing a specific example of the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect determination table. As shown in FIG. 9-39, the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect determination table is determined for each of the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect A, the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect A, and the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect B, respectively. A value has been assigned. The small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect A is, for example, an effect executed in a mode of displaying a predetermined effect image in a blue display color on the image display device 5. The small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect B is, for example, an effect executed in a mode in which a predetermined effect image is displayed in a red display color on the image display device 5.

As shown in FIG. 9-39, in this example, when the setting value is "1", the small hitting RUSH continuation suggesting effect has the highest execution rate, and when the setting value is "2", the small hitting RUSH continuation suggesting effect is shown. The execution ratio of the small hit RUSH continuation suggesting effect is even higher when the execution ratio of is next and the setting value is “3”, and the execution ratio of the small hit RUSH continuation suggesting effect is when the setting value is “4”. Is the next highest and the setting value is "5", the execution ratio of the small hit RUSH continuation suggesting effect is the next highest, and the setting value is "6", the execution ratio of the small hit RUSH continuation suggesting effect is the highest. It's getting low.

Further, as shown in FIG. 9-39, when the setting value is "1", the execution ratio of the small hitting RUSH continuation suggesting effect A is highest, and when the setting value is "6", the small hitting RUSH continuation suggesting effect B is shown. Has the highest execution rate.

In this example, the jackpot probability is the lowest when the setting value is "1", and the jackpot probability is the highest when the setting value is "6". However, when the setting value is "2", the jackpot is not generated. Since the second KT state may end as a trigger, the setting value "1" is the setting state in which the second KT state is most likely to continue (high continuation expectation level) and the setting value "6". In some cases, it can be said that the second KT state is the setting state in which it is most difficult to continue (the degree of continuation expectation is low). Therefore, in this example, when the set value is "1", the execution ratio of the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect is the highest, and when the setting value is "6", the execution ratio of the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect is the lowest. Therefore, by executing the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect, it is possible to increase the sense of expectation for continuing the second KT state (small hit RUSH).

Note that, as described above, the degree of continuation expectation of the second KT state (small hit RUSH) is the degree of expectation that the control period to the second KT state will be long without the occurrence of a big hit.

Further, in the present example, since the execution ratio of the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect A is the highest when the setting value is "1", the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect A is particularly executed, It is possible to further increase the sense of expectation for continuing the second KT state (small hit RUSH).

Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the current game state is the normal state (low probability/low base state) (step 076IWS926). It should be noted that whether or not the state is the normal state is determined by, for example, checking whether or not the high-probability state flag, the first KT state flag, and the second KT state flag (see steps 076IWS648, S652, and S656) are set. If neither is set, it can be determined that the normal state. If the gaming state is the normal state, the effect control CPU 120 executes the button notice effect setting process for determining the presence and type of the button notice effect (step 076IWS927).

In step 076IWS927, the effect control CPU 120 performs a lottery process based on a random number using the button notice effect determination table for determining the presence and type of the button notice effect, and determines the presence and type of the button notice effect.

FIG. 9-40 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a specific example of the button advance notice effect determination table. As shown in FIG. 9-40, in the button notice effect determination table, determination values are assigned for no button notice effect, execution of button notice effect A, and execution of button notice effect B, respectively. The "button notice effect A" is, for example, a notice effect that displays an operation prompting display prompting the operation of the push button 31B in a blue display color and then displays a notice display based on the detection of the push operation by the push button 31B. Is. The "button notice effect B" is, for example, a notice effect that displays the operation promotion display in a red display color and then displays the notice display based on the detection of the pressing operation by the push button 31B.

As shown in FIG. 9-40, in this example, when the button advance notice effect (button advance notice effect A, button advance notice effect B) is executed, compared to the case where the button advance notice effect is not executed, a big hit. The degree of expectation (reliability) is high. Further, in the case where the button notice effect B is executed among the button notice effects, the expectation (reliability) for the big hit is higher than that in the case where the button notice effect A is executed.

In this example, the button advance notice effect is configured to be executable only in the normal state (low probability/low base state), but the present invention is not limited to such an aspect. For example, the button advance notice effect may be configured to be executable even in the low probability/high base state (first KT state) or the high probability/high base state (first KT state), that is, during the first KT state. Further, even in the high-probability/low-base state (second KT state), the button advance notice effect may be configured to be executable with an extremely low probability.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 executes the jackpot time battle effect setting process for setting the execution of the battle effect executed during the jackpot (step 076IWS928).

Next, the effect control CPU 120 executes a small hit advance notice effect setting process for setting execution of a small hit advance notice effect (in this example, a small hit advance suggestion effect, a battle effect) (step 076IWS929).

Next, the effect control CPU 120, based on the variation pattern indicated by the received variation pattern command, the variation pattern of the decorative pattern to be used, and the set value suggestion effect and the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect, the battle effect, the small hit advance notice effect. When it is determined to execute, the process table corresponding to the set value suggestion effect, the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect, the battle effect, and the small hit advance notice effect is selected (step 076IWS930).

Next, the effect control CPU 120 sets the process timer set value of the process data 1 in the process table selected in step 076IWS930 to the process timer and starts the process timer (step 076IWS931). Next, the effect control CPU 120 controls the effect device (image display device 5, various lamps, speakers 8L, 8R) according to the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number data 1). Is executed (step 076IWS932). For example, a control signal (display control execution data) is output to the VDP in order to display an image according to the variation pattern on the image display device 5. In addition, a control signal (lamp control execution data) is output to the LED control board 14 in order to control the turning on/off of various lamps. Further, a control signal (sound number data) is output to the sound control board 13 in order to output sound from the speakers 8L and 8R.

When the execution of the set value suggestion effect is determined, the step 076IWS932 and the variable display effect effect process (step S172) are executed in accordance with the process table including the set value suggestion effect selected in step 076IWS930, so that the decoration The set value suggestion effect is executed during the variable display of the symbols (during the deviation).

When it is determined to execute the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect, step 076IWS932 and variable display effect effect processing (step S172) are executed according to the process table including the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect selected in step 076IWS930. As a result, the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect is executed during the variation display of the decorative pattern (during the variation of the deviation in the second KT state).

When the execution of the button notice effect is determined, the step 076IWS932 and the variable display effect effect process (step S172) are executed according to the process table including the button notice effect selected in step 076IWS930, so that the decorative pattern is displayed. The button advance notice effect is executed during the variable display (during the normal state).

When execution of the battle effect is decided, step 076IWS932 and the variable display during effect process (step S172) are executed according to the process table including the battle effect selected in step 076IWS930, so that the variable display of the decorative symbol is displayed. The battle effect is executed in the middle (high probability/low base state (second KT state)).

When it is determined to execute the small hit advance suggestion effect described later, step 076IWS932 and variable display effect effect processing (step S172) are executed according to the process table including the small hit advance suggestion effect selected in step 076IWS930. As a result, the small hit advance suggestion effect is executed during the variable display of the decorative pattern (during high probability/low base state (second KT state)).

Next, the effect control CPU 120 sets a value according to the variation time in the decorative symbol variation time timer to start the decorative symbol variation time timer (step 076IWS933). Next, the effect control CPU 101, the command at the time of starting winning stored in the first storage area of the command storing area at the time of starting winning (a symbol designating command, a variation category command, and a valid starting winning designation designating command (first effective). Start winning award designation command, second effective starting award designation command)) and delete the contents of the starting winning award command storage area (step 076IWS934).

Then, the effect control CPU 120 updates the effect control process flag to a value according to the variable display effect process (step S172) (step 076IWS935).

(Battle production setting process during big hit)
FIG. 9-41 is a flowchart showing the battle effect setting process (step 076IWS928) at the time of big hit. In the jackpot battle effect setting process, the effect control CPU 120 first confirms whether or not the variation pattern indicated by the received variation pattern command is the second variation pattern #21 (see FIG. 9-6(I)). (Step 076IWS501). If it is the second variation pattern #21 (that is, if the big hit variation of 2 minutes of variation time is performed during the high probability/low base state (second KT state)), the effect control CPU 120 determines that the big hit type is It is confirmed whether or not it is a probability variation big hit (10R probability variation big hit, 6R probability variation big hit, 2R probability variation big hit) (step 076IWS502). Whether or not the probability variation is a big hit can be determined by checking the display result designation command stored in the display result designation command storage area (see step 076IWS620).

If the probability is a big jackpot, the effect control CPU 120 determines to execute a battle effect (victory) in which the ally character wins the enemy character in the battle in the variable display started this time (step 076IWS503). On the other hand, if it is not the probability variation big hit (that is, if it is a normal big hit (6R normal big hit, 2R normal big hit)), the CPU 120 for effect control causes the ally character to battle against the enemy character in the variation display that starts this time. The execution of the battle effect (defeat) in the form of being defeated by is determined (step 076IWS504).

By executing the above processing, in this example, if the battle production is executed during the high-probability/low-base state (second KT state), and if the battle production in which the teammate character wins is executed, the probability change It is suggested that the probability change state continues as a big hit, and if the battle production in which the teammate character is defeated is executed, it is usually a big hit and the probability change state ends.

(Small hit notice production setting process)
FIG. 9-42 is a flowchart showing the small hit advance notice effect setting process (step 076IWS929). In the small hit announcement production setting process, the production control CPU 120 first confirms whether or not the second KT state flag is set (step 076IWS511). If the second KT state flag is set (that is, in the high-probability/low-base state (second KT state)), the effect control CPU 120 determines the number of small hits in the second pending storage being informed. It is confirmed whether or not the value of the small hit number counter for counting is 0 (step 076IWS512).

If the value of the small hit number counter is 0 (that is, if the number of small hits in the second pending storage currently informed is 0), the effect control CPU 120 indicates by the received variation pattern command. It is confirmed whether or not the fluctuation pattern to be applied is the second fluctuation pattern #21 (see FIG. 9-6(I)) (step 076IWS513). If it is the second fluctuation pattern #21 (that is, if the fluctuation display to be started this time is a big hit fluctuation), the process is ended. If it is not the second variation pattern #21 (that is, if the variation display to be started this time is a small hit variation), the effect control CPU 120 determines that the variation pattern indicated by the received variation pattern command is the second variation pattern #20 ( 9-6(I)) is confirmed (step 076IWS514).

If it is not the second variation pattern #20 (that is, if the small hit variation to be started this time is a variation display with a short variation time of 1.5 seconds or 5 seconds (second variation pattern # of FIG. 9-6(I)). 18, refer to #19)), the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the current number of second reserved memories is 1 (step 076IWS515). If the current second reserved storage number is 1, the process is ended as it is.

In this example, if there is only one second pending storage that is a small hit, the second pending storage will be exhausted immediately. Therefore, the processing of step 076IWS5153 is executed, and thus the small hit is performed. Although the case where the prior suggestion effect, the small hit number suggestion effect, and the gauge display are not performed at all is shown, the invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, since the gauge display is displayed for a short period of time, the small hit advance suggestion effect and the small hit number suggestion effect are executed, and the second pending storage that is a small hit until the variable display ends. It may be configured to display a gauge display indicating that the number is one.

If the current second reserved memory number is not 1 (that is, if the current second reserved memory number is 2 or more), the effect control CPU 120 causes the variable category command stored in the start winning command storage area. Of those, all those corresponding to the second reserved storage are extracted (step 076IWS516). Specifically, all the variable category commands stored in the start winning command storage area are stored in association with the second effective start winning designation command.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the variation category commands stored after the second variation category command among the read variation category commands have the second variation patterns #20 and #21. (Step 076IWS517). If there is a pattern having the second variation patterns #20 and #21 (that is, if there is a variation in the second hold storage that has a long variation time of 2 minutes and is accompanied by a battle effect), the process is ended.

By executing the process of step 076IWS517, when the second hold storage having a long variation time of 2 minutes is stored, the small hit advance suggestion effect, the small hit number suggestion effect, and the gauge display are not performed. I have to. That is, when the variation time is as long as 2 minutes, the battle effect may be executed and a big hit may occur. Therefore, if the number of small hits is notified in such a state, there is a second pending storage that becomes a big hit. This may be recognized by the player. Therefore, in the present example, when the second hold storage in which the variation time is as long as 2 minutes is stored, the small hit advance suggestion effect, the small hit number suggestion effect, and the gauge display are not performed. .. Even in such a case, the number of small hits before the second hold storage, which has a long variation time, is counted, and the small hit advance suggestion effect, the small hit number suggestion effect, and the gauge display are performed. You may comprise.

If there is nothing that becomes the second variation pattern #20, #21 (that is, if there is only a small win variation that the variation time is as short as 1.5 seconds or 5 seconds in the second hold storage) The control CPU 120 sets the current second pending storage number in the small hit number counter (step 076IWS518). Next, the effect control CPU 120 determines the type of the small hit advance suggestion effect that indicates in advance that a small hit will occur according to the value of the small hit number counter (step 076IWS519).

In step 076IWS519, the effect control CPU 120 performs a lottery process based on a random number using the small hit advance suggestion effect determination table for determining the type of small hit advance suggestion effect, and determines the kind of advance suggestion effect.

FIG. 9-43 is an explanatory view showing a specific example of the small hit advance suggestion effect determination table. Of these, FIG. 9-43(A) shows a specific example of the small hit advance suggestion effect determination table for the small hit number 2 which is selected when the value of the small hit number counter is 2. Further, FIG. 9-43(B) shows a specific example of the small hit preliminary suggestion effect determination table for the small hit number 3 which is selected when the value of the small hit number counter is 3. Further, FIG. 9-43(C) shows a specific example of the small hit preliminary suggestion effect determination table for the small hit number 4 which is selected when the value of the small hit number counter is 4. As shown in FIG. 9-43, in the small hit advance suggestion effect determination table, determination values are assigned to the small hit advance suggestion effect A, the small hit advance suggestion effect B, and the small hit advance suggestion effect C, respectively. ing.

The “small hit advance suggestion effect A” is, for example, a small hit advance suggestion effect executed in a mode in which the background image changes. The “small hit advance suggestion effect B” is, for example, a small hit advance suggestion effect executed in a mode in which an operation promotion display for prompting the operation of the push button 31B is displayed in a blue display color. Further, the “small hit advance suggestion effect C” is, for example, a small hit advance suggestion effect executed in a mode of displaying the operation promotion display in a red display color.

In this example, as shown in FIG. 9-43(A), when the number of small hits is 2, the execution ratio of the small hit advance suggestive effect A is the highest. Further, as shown in FIG. 9-43(B), when the number of small hits is 3, the execution ratio of the small hit advance suggestive effect B is the highest. Further, as shown in FIG. 9-43(C), when the number of small hits is 4, the execution ratio of the small hit preliminary suggestion effect C is the highest. Therefore, in this example, when the small hit advance suggestion effect C is executed, it is expected that the largest number of 4 as the number of small hits is notified, and when the small hit advance suggestion effect B is executed, It can be expected that the next highest number of 3 will be reported as the number of small hits.

By executing the above processing, in the present example, when the short hit variation that is as short as 1.5 seconds or 5 seconds during the high probability/low base state (second KT state) is executed, 2 If there is only a small variation in the pending storage that the variation time is as short as 1.5 seconds or 5 seconds, the small hit advance suggestion effect is executed in the variation display started this time.

In addition, in this example, if there is only one small hit variation in the second hold storage at step 076IWS517, which has a short variation time of 1.5 seconds or 5 seconds, the small hit advance suggestion effect is always executed. However, it may be configured such that the small hit advance suggestion effect may not be executed at a low rate.

Further, the types of small hit advance suggestion effects are not limited to those shown in this example. For example, it may be configured to display an operation promotion display for prompting the operation of different types of operation means (for example, the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B) according to the type of small hit advance suggestion effect, and various modes are possible. Conceivable.

If it is the second variation pattern #20 in step 076IWS514 (that is, if the small hit variation to be started this time is a variation display having a long variation time of 2 minutes), the effect control CPU 120 determines that the current second pending storage number is It is confirmed whether or not it is 1 (step 076IWS520). If the current second reserved memory number is 1, the effect control CPU 120 executes the battle effect (drawing) in which the battle between the ally character and the enemy character ends in a draw in the variable display started this time. Is determined (step 076IWS521).

In this example, if there is only one second reserved memory that is a small hit, the second reserved memory will be exhausted immediately, so that the processing of steps 076IWS520 and S521 is executed. The case where the battle effect (drawing) is executed and the small hit number suggestion effect and the gauge display are not performed at all is shown, but it is not limited to such a mode. For example, since there is a time for displaying the gauge display for a short time, it is possible to execute the effect suggesting the number of small hits, or to confirm that there is only one second holding memory that is a small hit until the variable display ends. It may be configured to display the gauge display shown.

If the current second reserved memory number is not 1 (that is, if the current second reserved memory number is 2 or more), the effect control CPU 120 causes the variable category command stored in the start winning command storage area. Of those, all those corresponding to the second reserved storage are extracted (step 076IWS522). Specifically, all the variable category commands stored in the start winning command storage area are stored in association with the second effective start winning designation command.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the variation category commands stored after the second variation category command among the read variation category commands have the second variation patterns #20 and #21. (Step 076IWS523). If there is one with the second variation patterns #20, #21 (that is, if there is a variation with a long variation time of 2 minutes in the second hold storage and a battle production), the production control CPU 120 starts this time. In the variable display, the execution of the battle effect (draw) in which the battle between the teammate character and the enemy character ends with a draw is determined (step 076IWS524).

By executing the processing of steps 076IWS523 and S524, when the second hold memory having a long variation time of 2 minutes is stored, the battle effect (drawing) is executed, and the small hit number suggestion effect and gauge The display is not done. That is, when the variation time is as long as 2 minutes, the battle effect may be executed and a big hit may occur. Therefore, if the number of small hits is notified in such a state, there is a second pending storage that becomes a big hit. This may be recognized by the player. Therefore, in this example, when the second hold storage in which the variation time is as long as 2 minutes is stored, the small hit number suggestion effect and the gauge display are not performed. Even in such a case, it may be configured to count the number of small hits before the second hold storage, which has a long variation time, and perform a small hit number suggesting effect or gauge display.

If there is nothing that becomes the second variation pattern #20, #21 (that is, if there is only a small win variation that the variation time is as short as 1.5 seconds or 5 seconds in the second hold storage) The control CPU 120 sets the current second pending storage number in the small hit number counter (step 076IWS525). Next, the effect control CPU 120 determines to execute a battle effect (victory) in which the ally character wins the battle against the enemy character in the variable display that starts this time (step 076IWS503).

By executing the above processing, in this example, even if the variation display started this time is a small hit (even if it is not a probability variation big hit), the number of small hits is displayed during the variation display. A battle effect (win) may be executed when is notified.

(Direction processing during variable display)
9-44 and 9-45 are flowcharts showing the variable display effect process (step S172) in the effect control process process. In the variable display effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 first decrements the value of the process timer by 1 (step 076IWS8101), and decrements the value of the decorative symbol variation time timer by 1 (step 076IWS8102). When the process timer times out (step 076IWS8103), the process data is switched. That is, the process timer set value set next in the process table is set in the process timer (step 076IWS8104). Further, the control state for the effect device is changed based on the display control execution data, the lamp control execution data and the sound number data which are set next (step 076IWS8105).

Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the first KT state flag or the second KT state flag is set (step 076IWS8106). If neither the first KT state flag nor the second KT state flag is set (that is, in the non-KT state), the effect control CPU 120 has received the first symbol confirmation designation command (for example, the first 1 Confirmation command reception flag is set) (step 076IWS8107). If the first symbol confirmation designation command is received, the effect control CPU 120 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value according to the special figure hit waiting process (step S173) (step 076IWS8110).

If the first symbol confirmation designation command has not been received, the effect control CPU 120 has received the first compulsory symbol confirmation designation command (for example, whether or not the first compulsory confirmation command reception flag is set). Is confirmed (step 076IWS8108). If the first compulsory symbol confirmation designation command is received, the effect control CPU 120 performs a process of replacing the stop symbol of the decorative symbol determined in step 076IWS921 of the variable display start setting process with a falling symbol (step 076IWS8109). And CPU120 for production control updates the value of the production control process flag to the value according to the special figure waiting process (step S173) (step 076IWS8110).

If the first KT state flag or the second KT state flag is set in step 076IWS8106 (that is, if it is the KT state), the effect control CPU 120 has received the second symbol confirmation designation command (for example, the first 2) Confirmation command reception flag is set) (step 076IWS8111). If the second symbol confirmation designation command is received, the effect control CPU 120 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value according to the special figure hit waiting process (step S173) (step 076IWS8114).

If the second symbol confirmation designation command has not been received, the effect control CPU 120 has received the second forced symbol confirmation designation command (for example, whether or not the second forced confirmation command reception flag is set). Is confirmed (step 076IWS8112). If the second compulsory symbol confirmation designation command is received, the effect control CPU 120 performs a process of replacing the stop symbol of the decorative symbol determined in step 076IWS921 of the variable display start setting process with a falling symbol (step 076IWS8113). Then, the effect control CPU 120 updates the value of the effect control process flag to the value according to the special figure waiting process (step S173) (step 076IWS8114).

If neither the first compulsory symbol confirmation designation command nor the second compulsory symbol confirmation designation command has been received (step 076 IWS8108, N in S8112), the effect control CPU 120 starts the button notice effect or the small hit advance suggestion effect B, C. It is confirmed whether or not the timing has come (step 076IWS8115). Whether or not it is the start timing of the button advance notice effect and the small hit advance suggestion effect B, C is confirmed by, for example, the value of the decorative symbol variation time timer set in step 076IWS933 of the variable display start setting process. Can be determined by.

If it is the start timing of the button notice effect or the small hit advance suggestion effects B and C, the effect control CPU 120 causes the image display device 5 to display a color according to the type of the button notice effect or the small hit advance suggestion effect. The control for displaying the operation promotion display is performed (step 076IWS8116). In this case, if the button advance notice effect A or the small hit advance suggestion effect B is executed, the operation promotion display is displayed in the blue display color. If the button advance notice effect B or the small hit advance suggestion effect C is executed, the operation promotion display is displayed in a red display color.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the button notice effect is being executed (step 076IWS8117). If the button advance notice effect is being executed, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the pressing operation of the push button 31B is detected (specifically, whether or not the detection signal from the push sensor 35B is input). (Step 076IWS8118). If the push operation of the push button 31B is not detected, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the effect period of the button notice effect has passed (step 076IWS8119). Whether or not the effect period of the button notice effect has elapsed can be determined, for example, by checking the value of the decorative symbol variation time timer set in step 076IWS933 of the variable display start setting process.

If the push operation of the push button 31B is detected (Y in step 076IWS8118) or if the effect period of the button notice effect has elapsed (Y in step 076IWS8119), the effect control CPU 120 causes the image display device 5 to operate. , And controls to display a predetermined notice display (step 076IWS8120). In this case, for example, the image display device 5 displays a character display or the like indicating a possibility of a big hit, such as “intense heat” or “chance”.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the small hit advance suggestion effect is being executed (step 076IWS8121). If the small hit advance suggestion effect is being executed, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the push operation of the push button 31B is detected (specifically, whether or not the detection signal from the push sensor 35B is input). Is confirmed (step 076IWS8122). If the pressing operation of the push button 31B is not detected, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the effect period of the small hit advance suggestion effect has passed (step 076IWS8123). Whether or not the effect period of the small hit advance suggestion effect has elapsed can be determined, for example, by checking the value of the decorative symbol variation time timer set in step 076IWS933 of the variable display start setting process.

If the effect period of the small hit prior suggestion effect has not passed, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not it is the execution timing of the other small hit number suggestion effect (step 076IWS8124). Specifically, in the case of executing the small hit advance suggestion effect A, if it is the end timing of the small hit advance suggestion effect A, it is the execution timing of the other small hit number suggestion effects. judge. Further, when the battle effect (win) is executed in the small hit variation (see step 076IWS526), and when the end timing of the battle effect (win) is reached, the execution timing of the other small hit number suggesting effect is executed. It is determined that it has become.

If the push operation of the push button 31B is detected (Y in step 076IWS8122), or if the effect period of the button notice effect has passed (Y in step 076IWS8123), or the execution timing of other small hit number suggestion effects If it is (Y in step 076IWS8124), the effect control CPU 120, in the image display device 5, suggests the number of small hits according to the value of the small hit number counter (indicates the number of small hits in the second pending storage). Control for executing (notifying) is performed (step 076IWS8125). In this case, for example, if the value of the small hit number counter is 2, a character display such as "small hit +2 times!" is displayed on the image display device 5. Further, for example, when the value of the small hit number counter is 3, a character display such as "small hit +3 times!" is displayed on the image display device 5. Further, for example, when the value of the small hit number counter is 4, a character display such as "small hit +4 times!" is displayed on the image display device 5.

Further, the effect control CPU 120 controls the image display device 5 to start gauge display according to the value of the small hit number counter in the image display device 5 (step 076IWS8126).

Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the decorative symbol variation time timer has timed out (step 076IWS8127). If the decorative symbol variation time timer has timed out, the effect control CPU 120 switches to process data for standby effect (step 076IWS8128). Then, the effect control CPU 120 restarts the process timer (step 076IWS8129).

In this example, as already described, when the variable display of the second special symbol is a small hit, the variation display of the first special symbol that is a deviant or small hit, the probability big hit is being executed. In, during the small hit game, the update of the first variation time timer is interrupted and the variation display of the first special symbol is continuously executed. Also, when the variation display of the first special symbol is a small hit, if the variation display of the second special symbol that is a deviation or a small hit, the probability variation big hit is being executed, during the small hit game. The update of the second variable time timer is interrupted, and the variable display of the second special symbol is continuously executed. Without receiving any symbol confirmation designation command, the decorative symbol variation time timer has timed out in step 076IWS8127, which means that the updating of the first variation time timer or the second variation time timer is interrupted, and the first It is a case where the variable display of the special symbol or the second special symbol is continuously executed. In this case, in this example, the process of steps 076IWS8128 and S8129 is executed to switch to the standby effect, and thereafter, the update of the first variation time timer or the second variation time timer is restarted and finally one special The standby effect is continued until the variable display of the symbols or the second special symbols is completed. The "standby effect" is, for example, an effect in which the left, right, and right decorative patterns on the image display device 5 are temporarily stopped in a swinging or slightly varying state.

Note that, for example, in the image display device 5, for example, when the variable display of the system small symbol or the fourth symbol is also executed, the update of the first variable time timer or the second variable time timer is interrupted and the first special time timer is interrupted. When the variable display of the symbol or the second special symbol is continuously executed, the variable display of these system small symbols and the fourth symbol is also continuously executed. Then, the update of the first fluctuation time timer or the second fluctuation time timer is restarted, and when the fluctuation display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is finally stopped and displayed, these system small symbols and fourth symbols The variable display is also stopped.

(Waiting process for special maps)
FIG. 9-46 and FIG. 9-47 are flowcharts showing the special figure per wait process (step S173) in the effect control process process. In the special figure hit waiting process, the CPU 120 for effect control first confirms whether or not the stop symbol display flag 1 indicating that the big hit symbol is displayed as the stop symbol of the decorative symbol is set (step 076IWS9701). .. If the stop symbol display flag 1 is set, the process proceeds to step 076IWS9706. In this characteristic part 076IW, when the big hit symbol is displayed as the stop symbol of the decorative symbol, the stop symbol display flag 1 is set in step 076IWS9705. Then, the stop symbol display flag 1 is reset when executing the big hit mid effect. Therefore, the fact that the stop symbol display flag 1 is set means that the big hit symbol has been confirmed and displayed, but the stage during the big hit has not yet been executed. Therefore, the process of displaying the stop symbol of the decorative symbol in step 076IWS9703 is performed. Without executing, the process proceeds to step 076IWS9706.

If the stop symbol display flag 1 is not set, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the stop symbol display flag 2 indicating that the small hit symbol is displayed as the stop symbol of the decorative symbol is set. (Step 076IWS9702). If the stop symbol display flag 2 is set, the process proceeds to step 076IWS9717. In this characteristic part 076IW, when the small hitting symbol is displayed as the stop symbol of the decorative symbol, the stop symbol display flag 2 is set in step 076IWS9716. Then, the stop symbol display flag 2 is reset when executing the effect during the small hit. Therefore, the fact that the stop symbol display flag 2 is set means that the small hit symbol has been fixedly displayed but the effect during the small hit has not been executed yet, so the stop symbol of the decorative symbol of step 076IWS9703 is displayed. The process moves to step 076IWS9717 without executing the process.

If neither the stop symbol display flag 1 nor the stop symbol display flag 2 is set, the effect control CPU 120 causes the image display device 5 to stop the stop symbol of the left-middle-right decorative symbol (stopping symbol, jackpot symbol). , Small hit symbol) is confirmed and displayed (step 076IWS9703). In addition, when the first compulsory symbol confirmation designation command and the second compulsory symbol confirmation designation command are received and the process of replacing with the deviation symbol is executed in steps 076IWS8109 and S8113, in step 076IWS9703, the effect control CPU 120, the deviation symbol The control to confirm is displayed.

When the big hit symbol is confirmed and displayed in the process of step 076IWS9703 (Y in step 076IWS9704), the effect control CPU 120 sets the stop symbol display flag 1 (step 076IWS9705).

Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the big hit start designation command has been received (step 076IWS9706). When the big hit start designation command is received, the effect control CPU 120 resets the stop symbol display flag 1 (step 076IWS9707).

Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the award ball number display is being displayed on the image display device 5 (step 076IWS9708). If the number of prize balls is not displayed, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the type of big hit that has occurred this time is a 10R certainty variation big hit, a 6R certainty variation big hit, or a 6R regular big hit (step 076IWS9709). Whether or not the jackpot type is the 10R certainty variation jackpot, the 6R certainty variation jackpot, or the 6R regular jackpot is determined by, for example, whether the received display result designation command is a display result 2 designation command to a display result 4 designation command. It can be determined by checking. If it is a 10R probability big hit, a 6R probability big hit, or a 6R normal big hit, the effect control CPU 120 performs control to start displaying the number of prize balls on the image display device 5 (step 076IWS9710).

By executing the processing of steps 076IWS9708 to S9710, in the present example, the display of the number of prize balls is started when the big hit game based on the 10R certainty big hit, the 6R certainty big hit, or the 6R normal big hit is started. On the other hand, even if it is a big hit, when the big hit game based on the 2R probability variation big hit or the 2R normal big hit is started, the display of the number of prize balls is not started.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 selects a process table corresponding to the effect during the big hit (step 076IWS9711). Next, the production control CPU 120 starts the process timer by setting the process timer setting value to the process timer (step 076IWS9712), and the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number). According to the data 1), the control of the rendering device (the image display device 5 as the rendering component, various lamps as the rendering component, and the speakers 8L and 8R as the rendering component) is executed (step 076IWS9713).

After that, the CPU 120 for effect control updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value according to the effect process during big hit (step S176) (step 076IWS9714).

If the big hit symbol is not definitely displayed in the process of step 076IWS9703 (N of step 076IWS9704), if the small hit symbol is definitely displayed in the process of step 076IWS9703 (Y of step 076IWS9715), the CPU 120 for effect control is stopped. The symbol display flag 2 is set (step 076IWS9716).

Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the small hit start designation command has been received (step 076IWS9717). When the small hit start designation command is received, the effect control CPU 120 resets the stop symbol display flag 2 (step 076IWS9718).

Next, the effect control CPU 120 selects a process table corresponding to the effect during the small hit (step 076IWS9719). Next, the effect control CPU 120 starts the process timer by setting the process timer setting value to the process timer (step 076IWS9720), and the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number). According to the data 1), the control of the rendering device (the image display device 5 as the rendering component, various lamps as the rendering component, and the speakers 8L and 8R as the rendering component) is executed (step 076IWS9721).

Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the second KT state flag is set (step 076IWS9722). If the second KT state flag is set (that is, if it is a high probability/low base state (second KT state)), the effect control CPU 120 subtracts 1 from the value of the small hit number counter (step 076IWS9723). Further, the effect control CPU 120 performs control to update the gauge display displayed on the image display device 5 based on the value of the small hit number counter after subtraction (step 076IWS9724).

In this example, the processing of steps 076IWS9722 to S9724 is executed, so that the value of the small hit number counter is subtracted at the end of the variable display, and the gauge display is reduced by one. Therefore, when the indication of the number of small hits is executed at the start of the fluctuation and the gauge display is started, the first small hit occurs immediately at the end of the fluctuation display and the scale of the gauge display is decreased by one. Will be done.

It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to the mode shown in this example, and for example, the value of the small hit number counter may be subtracted at the start of fluctuation to reduce the scale on the gauge display by one, and various modes may be considered. Be done.

Then, the effect control CPU 120 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the effect processing during the small hit (step S174) (step 076IWS9725).

When the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol is not displayed in the process of step 076IWS9703 (that is, when the deviant symbol is displayed) (N in step 076IWS9704 and N in step 076IWS9715), the effect control CPU 120 controls the effect. The value of the process flag is updated to a value according to the variable display start waiting process (step S170) (step 076IWS9726).

(Ending production process)
FIG. 9-48 is a flowchart showing the ending effect process (step S177) in the effect control process process shown in FIG. In the ending effect process, the effect control CPU 120 first subtracts 1 from the value of the effect period measurement timer (step 076IWS951). The production period measurement timer is set based on the fact that all the rounds of the big hit game have been completed in the big hit midway production process (see step S176). Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the effect period measurement timer has timed out (step 076IWS952).

When the effect period measurement timer has not timed out (N in step 076IWS952), the effect control CPU 120 subtracts 1 from the value of the process timer (step 076IWS953), and the effect device (image display device 5 according to the content of the process data n). , Game effect lamp 9, speakers 8L, 8R, etc. are controlled (step 076IWS954). For example, an effect of displaying that the jackpot is over or displaying a predetermined character is executed.

And CPU120 for production control confirms whether the process timer has timed out (step 076IWS955), and if the process timer has timed out, it switches the process data (step 076IWS956). Then, the process timer set value in the next process data is set in the process timer to start the process timer (step 076IWS957).

If the production period measurement timer has timed out (Y in step 076IWS952), the production control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the big hit game to be finished this time is a big hit game based on the 6R certainty variation big hit or the 6R normal big hit (step). 076IWS958). Whether the 6R probability variation big hit or the 6R normal big hit is whether or not the display result designation command stored in the display result designation command storage area is the display result 3 designation command or the display result 4 designation command, for example. It can be determined by checking. If it is a 6R probability variation big hit or a 6R normal big hit, the effect control CPU 120 performs control to end the display of the number of prize balls displayed on the image display device 5 (step 076IWS959).

By executing the processing of steps 076IWS958 to S959, in the present example, when executing the big hit game based on the 6R probability variation big hit or the 6R normal big hit, the number of prize balls is displayed during the big hit game, and the big hit When the game is over, the prize ball number display is erased, and the prize ball number display is not displayed during the high probability/first KT state or low probability/first KT state after the jackpot game is over.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the big hit game to be finished this time is a big hit game based on the 2R certainty variation big hit (step 076IWS960). Whether or not the 2R probability variation big hit can be determined, for example, by checking whether or not the display result designation command stored in the display result designation command storage area is the display result 5 designation command. If it is a 2R probability variation big hit, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the number of prize balls is being displayed on the image display device 5 (step 076IWS961). If the prize ball number display is not being displayed, the effect control CPU 120 performs control to start displaying the prize ball number display on the image display device 5 (step 076IWS962).

By executing the processing of steps 076IWS960 to S962, in the present example, when executing the big hit game based on the 2R probability variation big hit, the prize ball number display is not displayed during the big hit game (however, In this example, if the number of prize balls is displayed before the 2R probability variation big hit is displayed, the number of prize balls is continuously displayed, but the display is not updated), a high probability after the big hit game ends. / During the second KT state, the number of prize balls is displayed.

After that, the effect control CPU 120 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value according to the variable display start waiting process (step S170) (step 076IWS963).

(Direction example)
Next, a description will be given of a presentation mode of the presentation performed in the present characteristic unit 076IW. First, the presentation mode of the set value suggestion production will be described. FIG. 9-49 is an explanatory diagram for describing an effect mode of the set value suggestion effect. In this example, the set value suggesting effect can be executed in the variable display of the decorative pattern that is out of alignment. As shown in FIG. 9-49(A), when the image display device 5 is performing variable display of the left-middle-right decorative design, when it becomes the execution timing of the set value suggestive effect, FIG. ) To (B3), the set value suggestion effect is executed during the variable display of the decorative pattern.

In this example, as shown in FIGS. 9-49 (B1) to (B3), the set value suggestion effect is executed in a mode in which the predetermined character images 076IW001, 076IW002, 076IW003 are displayed on the image display device 5. In this case, for example, when the set value suggestive effect A is executed, as shown in FIG. 9-49 (B1), the predetermined character image 076IW001 is displayed on the image display device 5 in a blue display color. Value suggestion production is executed. Further, for example, when the set value suggesting effect C is executed, as shown in FIG. 9-49 (B2), the set value is set in a mode in which the predetermined character image 076IW002 is displayed in the yellow display color on the image display device 5. Suggestive production is executed. Further, for example, when the set value suggestive effect E is executed, as shown in FIG. 9-49(B3), the set value is set in a mode in which the predetermined character image 076IW003 is displayed in the red display color on the image display device 5. Suggestive production is executed.

In addition, in the example shown in FIG. 9-49, the case where the set value suggestive effect A, the set value suggestive effect C, and the set value suggestive effect E are executed is shown, but for example, when the set value suggestive effect B is executed. Indicates a predetermined character image with a green display color, a predetermined character image with an orange display color when the set value suggestion effect D is executed, and a rainbow when the set value suggestion effect F is executed. A predetermined character image is displayed in the color display color.

In this example, which setting value is currently set for the player depending on whether a character image of a different display color is displayed during the variable display of the decorative pattern that is out of order and the setting value suggestion effect is executed. Can be expected.

Next, an effect mode of the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect will be described. FIG. 9-50 is an explanatory diagram for describing a production mode of a small hit RUSH continuation suggestion production. In this example, the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect can be executed in the variable display of the decorative pattern which is out of the second KT state (during the small hit RUSH).

In the present example, when in the second KT state, as shown in FIG. 9-50(A), for example, the character display 076IW004 such as “small hit RUSH” is displayed on the image display device 5, and the second KT state is displayed. It is displayed so that it is in the middle. Then, as shown in FIG. 9-50(A), when the variable display of the left-middle-right decorative design is being executed on the image display device 5 during the second KT state, the execution timing of the small hit RUSH continuation suggesting effect Then, as shown in FIGS. 9-50 (B1) to (B3), the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect is executed during the variable display of the decorative pattern.

In this example, as shown in FIGS. 9-50 (B1) and (B2), the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect is executed by a mode in which the predetermined effect images 076IW005 and 076IW006 are displayed on the image display device 5. In this example, a case where a racing car image is displayed as the predetermined effect images 076IW005 and 076IW006 is shown. In this case, for example, when the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect A is executed, as shown in FIG. 9-50(B1), a predetermined effect image 076IW005 is displayed in the image display device 5 in a blue display color. Thus, the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect is executed. Further, for example, when the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect B is executed, as shown in FIG. 9-50 (B2), a predetermined effect image 076IW005 is displayed in the image display device 5 in a red display color. The small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect is executed.

In this example, the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect is executed or the effect image of any display color is displayed and the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion is displayed during the variable display of the decorative pattern which is out of the second KT state. Depending on whether or not the effect is executed, the player can be expected to continue the second KT state (small hit RUSH).

Next, the display mode of the right-handed notification will be described. FIG. 9-51 is an explanatory diagram for describing the display mode of the right-handed notification. In this example, regardless of whether it is a big hit in the variable display of the first special symbol or whether it is a big hit by executing the variable display of the second special symbol, in the case of a big hit game As shown in FIG. 9-51(1), the right-handed indicator 26 is turned on by the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) (see steps 076IWS2018A and S2018B). Further, based on the reception of the right-handing lighting start designation command, the right-handling notification LED 37 is turned on by the effect control CPU 120 as shown in FIG. 9-51(1) (step 076IWS2019A, S2019B, S639). reference). Further, as shown in FIG. 9-51(1), the right-handed display 076IW007 is displayed on the display screen of the image display device 5 by the effect control CPU 120 (see step 076IWS624).

Further, in this example, when the small hit in the variable display of the second special symbol, during the small hit game, as shown in FIG. 9-51 (2), the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically The right-handed indicator 26 is turned on by the CPU 103) (see step 076IWS2024B). Further, based on the reception of the right-handing lighting start designation command, the right-handling notification LED 37 is turned on by the effect control CPU 120 as shown in FIG. 9-51(2) (see steps 076IWS2025B and S639). .. However, unlike during the big hit game, as shown in FIG. 9-51(2), the right-handed display 076IW007 is not displayed on the display screen of the image display device 5.

On the other hand, in the present example, when the small hit in the variable display of the first special symbol, as shown in FIG. 9-51 (3), during the small hit game, the right-handed indicator 26 is lit and right. The hitting notification LED 37 is not turned on, and the right hitting display 076IW007 on the display screen of the image display device 5 is not displayed.

Next, a description will be given of effect modes of the over-winning suggestion effect, the small hit winning suggestion effect, and the award ball number display suggesting effect. FIGS. 9-52 and 9-53 are explanatory diagrams for explaining the effect modes of the over-winning suggestion effect, the small hit winning suggestion effect, and the award ball number display suggesting effect. 9-52 and 9-53, the display screen transitions in the order of (A), (B), (C),.... Further, in the example shown in FIGS. 9-52 and 9-53, there is shown a case where the big hit game state is controlled based on the fact that the 10R probability variation big hit has been achieved.

As shown in FIG. 9-52(A), during the big hit game, the image display device 5 displays a character display such as “Big hit!” and a round number display such as “Round 2”. The number of prize balls display 076IW008 is displayed. Also, when a normal winning (non-over winning) to the special winning opening occurs during the big hit game, as shown in FIG. 9-52(B), the normal display color (white in this example) is displayed. 076IW009 (in this example, the character display of “+15”) is displayed, and the normal winning sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R (see steps 076IWS307 and S308).

Next, it is assumed that an over-winning occurs during the big hit game, and the execution of the over-winning suggestion effect is decided based on the occurrence of the over-winning. In this case, as shown in FIG. 9-52(C), the prize display 076IW010 (in this example, the character display of “+15”) corresponding to the determined type of the over-winning suggestion effect is displayed, and the speaker 8L is displayed. , 8R outputs winning sounds according to the determined type of over-winning suggestion effect (see steps 076IWS305 and S306). For example, when the over-winning suggestion effect A is executed, the winning display of the blue sound is displayed on the image display device 5, and the winning sound of the sound A is output from the speakers 8L and 8R.

Next, it is assumed that the number of prize balls reaches 456 and the execution of the prize ball number display suggestion effect A is determined based on the number of prize balls reaching 456. In this case, as shown in FIG. 9-52(D), the character display 076IW011 such as "456 OVER" is displayed on the image display device 5, and the prize sphere number display suggestive effect A is executed (see step 076IWS360).

In this example, the case where the prize sphere number display suggesting effect A is executed is shown. However, for example, when the execution of the prize sphere number indicating suggestion effect B is decided, “555” is displayed on the image display device 5. A character display such as "OVER" is displayed, and the prize ball number display suggestion effect B is executed. Further, for example, when the execution of the prize sphere number display suggestion effect C is determined, a character display such as “666 OVER” is displayed on the image display device 5, and the prize sphere number display suggestion effect C is executed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-53(E), when the big hit game is finished, the game state is controlled to a high probability/second KT state after the big hit game is finished. Further, when the high probability/second KT state is controlled, as shown in FIG. 9-53(F), a character display such as “Small hit RUSH medium!” is displayed and the award ball number display 076IW008 continues. Will be displayed.

Next, in the high probability/second KT state, a small hit occurs and a game ball is won into the special winning opening. However, if the execution of the small hit winning suggestion effect is not decided, then FIG. As shown in (F), the winning display 076IW012 (in this example, the character display of “+10”) is displayed in the normal display color (white in this example), and the normal sound is won from the speakers 8L and 8R. Sound is output (see steps 076IWS325 and S326).

Next, during the high probability/second KT state, a small hit occurs and a special game ball is won in the special winning opening. It has been decided to execute. In this case, as shown in FIG. 9-53(G), the prize display 076IW013 (in this example, the character display of "+10") corresponding to the determined type of the small hit winning suggestion effect is displayed and the speaker is displayed. From 8L and 8R, the winning sound corresponding to the determined type of the small hit winning suggestion effect is output (see steps 076IWS323 and S324). For example, when the small hit winning suggestion effect A is executed, the winning display of the sound A is output from the speakers 8L and 8R while the winning display is displayed in the image display device 5 in the blue display color.

Next, it is assumed that the number of prize balls has reached 2666 during the high-probability/second KT state, and the execution of the prize ball number display suggestive effect F has been decided based on the number of prize balls reaching 2666. In this case, as shown in FIG. 9-53(H), the character display 076IW014 such as “2666 OVER” is displayed on the image display device 5, and the prize sphere number display suggesting effect F is executed (see step 076IWS360).

In this example, the case where the prize sphere number display suggesting effect F is executed is shown. However, for example, when the execution of the prize sphere number indicating suggestion effect D is determined, “2456” is displayed on the image display device 5. A character display such as “OVER” is displayed, and the prize ball number display suggestion effect D is executed. Further, for example, when the execution of the prize sphere number display suggesting effect E is decided, a character display such as “2555 OVER” is displayed on the image display device 5, and the prize sphere number indicating suggestion effect E is executed.

Although illustration is omitted in the examples shown in FIGS. 9-52 and 9-53, for example, the execution of the prize sphere emphasis effect A is determined based on the number of prize spheres reaching 1000. In this case, the character display such as “1000 OVER” is displayed on the image display device 5, and the prize ball number enhancement effect A is executed. Further, for example, when the execution of the prize ball number enhancement effect B is determined based on the number of prize balls reaching 2000, a character display such as “2000 OVER” is displayed on the image display device 5. , The prize ball number emphasis effect B is executed. In addition, for example, when the execution of the prize sphere emphasis effect C is determined based on the number of prize balls reaching 3000, a character display such as “3000 OVER” is displayed on the image display device 5. , The prize ball number emphasis effect C is executed. In addition, for example, when the execution of the prize sphere emphasis effect D is decided based on the number of prize spheres reaching 4000, a character display such as “4000 OVER” is displayed on the image display device 5. , The prize ball number emphasis effect D is executed. Further, for example, when the execution of the prize sphere emphasis effect E is determined based on the number of prize spheres reaching 5000, a character display such as “5000 OVER” is displayed on the image display device 5. , The prize ball number emphasizing effect E is executed.

In this example, the number of prize balls has reached 456, 555, 666, 2456, 2555, or 2666 (in other words, a big hit game or a high probability/small hit in the second KT state) Although the case where the prize ball number display suggesting effects A to F are executed at different selection rates according to the total of the game value given by) is shown, the present invention is not limited to such an aspect. For example, depending on the number of small hits that occur during the high probability/second KT state or the number of times that the variable display is executed during the high probability/second KT state, the prize ball number display suggestive effects A to F are selected at different selection ratios. May be configured to perform, and various aspects are possible.

Next, an effect mode of the small hit advance suggestion effect, the small hit number suggestion effect, and the battle effect executed during the high probability/low base state (second KT state) will be described. FIG. 9-54 to FIG. 9-59 are explanations for explaining the effect mode of the small hit advance suggestion effect, the small hit number suggestion effect, and the battle effect executed during the high probability/low base state (second KT state). It is a figure. 9-54 to 9-59, the display screen transitions in the order of (A), (B), (C),....

In the high-probability/low-base state (second KT state), as shown in FIG. 9-54(A), in the image display device 5, for example, a character display 076IW020 such as "small hit RUSH medium!" Is displayed to inform that the high probability/low base state (second KT state) is being performed. Further, in this example, when in the high probability/low base state (second KT state), the gauge display 076IW021 is displayed on the image display device 5 as shown in FIG. 2 The number of small hits in the pending storage may be reported. In the present example, since the gauge display 076IW021 is displayed in such a manner that the scales up to the third scale are filled, it is informed that there are three second reserved memories that are small hits.

Next, when a small hit occurs during the high probability/low base state (second KT state), the scale of the gauge display 076IW021 is decreased by one as shown in FIG. It is informed that the pending storage has decreased to two (see step 076IWS9724). Next, when a small hit occurs during the high probability/low base state (second KT state), as shown in FIG. 9-54(C), the scale of the gauge display 076IW021 is decreased by one, and the small hit occurs. 2 It is informed that the number of pending storage has decreased to one (see step 076IWS9724).

Then, when a small hit occurs during the high probability/low base state (second KT state), the scale of the gauge display 076IW021 is decreased by one, as shown in FIG. 2 It is notified that the pending storage has become 0 (see step 076IWS9724). In this example, when the number of small hits in the second pending storage being notified becomes 0, the gauge display 076IW021 is erased, for example, as shown in FIG. 9-55(E). Not limited to such an aspect, during the high-probability/low-base state (second KT state), even if the number of small hits in the second reserved memory being informed becomes 0, the gauge display 076IW021 continues to be displayed. It may be configured to do so.

Then, as shown in FIG. 9-55(E), it is assumed that the next variable display is started. In the example shown in FIG. 9-55(E), the number of small hits in the second pending storage being notified is 0 (see step 076IWS512), and the fluctuation display started this time has a fluctuation time of 1.5 seconds or Based on the fact that the small hit variation is as short as 5 seconds (see N in step 076IWS514), it is assumed that the execution of the small hit advance suggestive effect has been decided. Further, it is assumed that the small hit advance suggestion effect A is determined as the type of the small hit advance suggestion effect (see step 076IWS519).

Next, when it comes to the execution timing of the small hit advance suggestion effect A, as shown in FIG. 9-55(F), in the image display device 5, a display 076IW022 in which the background image is separated from the central portion and the background image changes. The small hit advance suggestion effect A is executed. Next, when it comes to the end timing of the small hit advance suggestion effect A, as shown in FIG. 9-55(G), the small hit number suggestion effect is executed (see step 076IWS8125). In the example shown in FIG. 9-55(G), since the number of small hits in the second reserved storage is 4, a case where a character display 076IW023 such as "small hit +4 times!" is displayed. ing.

In this example, as shown in FIGS. 9-55 (F) and (G), during the execution of the small hit advance suggestion effect A and the small hit number suggestion effect, the upper right end portion of the display screen of the image display device 5 is displayed. At, the variable display of the decorative pattern is reduced and displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-55(H), the gauge display 076IW021 starts to be displayed according to the number of small hits in the second reserved storage (see step 076IWS8126). In the example shown in FIG. 9-55(H), since the number of small hits in the second pending storage is 4, the display of the gauge display 076IW021 is started in a mode in which the scales up to the fourth scale are filled. The case is shown.

When the next variable display is started, for example, when only two second reserved memories are accumulated and the number of small hits in the second reserved memory is 2, (Fig. 9-55). In H), the gauge display 076IW021 starts to be displayed in such a manner that the scales up to the second scale are filled. In addition, for example, when only three second reserved memories are accumulated and the number of small hits in the second reserved memory is 3, in FIG. 9-55(H), up to the third scale is displayed. The gauge display 076IW021 starts to be displayed in a state where the filling is completed.

In the present example, for example, when the number of small hits in the second reserved memory is four, the gauge display 076IW021 is displayed in a manner of uniformly notifying the number of four small hits. However, it is not limited to such an aspect. For example, even if the number of small hits is four, the gauge display 076IW021 may be displayed in a mode of notifying the number of small hits of two or three.

On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 9-56(E), it is assumed that the small hit advance suggestion effect B is determined as the type of the small hit advance suggestion effect (see step 076IWS519). In this case, when it comes to the execution timing of the small hit advance suggestion effect B, as shown in FIG. 9-56(F), a push button with a blue display color together with a character display such as “PUSH!” on the image display device 5. The operation promotion display 076IW024 including an image simulating 31B is displayed, and the small hit advance suggestion effect B is executed (see step 076IWS8116).

Next, when the push button 31B is pressed (see step 076IWS8122) or when the production period of the small hit advance suggestion production has passed (see step 076IWS8123), as shown in FIG. The number suggestion effect is executed (see step 076IWS8125). In the example shown in FIG. 9-56(G), since the number of small hits in the second reserved memory is 4, a case where a character display 076IW023 such as “small hit +4 times!” is displayed is shown. ing.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-56(H), the gauge display 076IW021 starts to be displayed according to the number of small hits in the second reserved storage (see step 076IWS8126). In the example shown in FIG. 9-56(H), since the number of small hits in the second pending storage is 4, the display of the gauge display 076IW021 is started in such a manner that the scales up to the fourth scale are filled. The case is shown.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 9-57(E), it is assumed that the small hit advance suggestion effect C is determined as the type of the small hit advance suggestion effect (see step 076IWS519). In this case, when it comes to the execution timing of the small hit advance suggestion effect C, as shown in FIG. 9-57(F), the image display device 5 displays a character such as “PUSH!” and a push button with a red display color. The operation promotion display 076IW025 including an image imitating 31B is displayed, and the small hit advance suggestion effect C is executed (see step 076IWS8116).

Next, when the push button 31B is pressed (see step 076IWS8122) or when the production period of the small hit advance suggestion production has passed (see step 076IWS8123), as shown in FIG. The number suggestion effect is executed (see step 076IWS8125). In the example shown in FIG. 9-57(G), since the number of small hits in the second reserved memory is 4, a case where a character display 076IW023 such as “small hit +4 times!” is displayed is shown. ing.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-57(H), the gauge display 076IW021 starts to be displayed according to the number of small hits in the second reserved storage (see step 076IWS8126). In the example shown in FIG. 9-57(H), since the number of small hits in the second pending storage is 4, the display of the gauge display 076IW021 is started in a mode in which the scales up to the fourth scale are filled. The case is shown.

Furthermore, when the number of small hits in the second pending storage being informed is 0, if a variable display having a long variable time of 2 minutes is executed as the next variable display, the battle is displayed during the variable display. The production may be executed. In this case, as shown in FIG. 9-58(E), after the next variable display is started, at the execution timing of the battle effect, as shown in FIG. 9-58(F), the ally character 076IW026 appears. At the same time, an enemy character 076IW027 appears, and an effect such that a ally character 076IW026 and an enemy character 076IW027 battle each other is executed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-58(G), when an effect such that the ally character 076IW026 wins the battle is executed and the effect period of the battle effect has elapsed (see step 076IWS8124), FIG. 9-58( As shown in H), the effect of suggesting the number of small hits is executed (see step 076IWS8125). In the example shown in FIG. 9-58(H), since the number of small hits in the second reserved storage is 4, a case where a character display 076IW023 such as “small hit +4 times!” is displayed is shown. ing.

In this example, as shown in FIGS. 9-58(F) to (H), during execution of the battle effect and the small hit number suggesting effect, the decorative pattern is displayed at the upper right end of the display screen of the image display device 5. The variable display is reduced.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-59(I), the gauge display 076IW021 is displayed in accordance with the number of small hits in the second reserved storage (see step 076IWS8126). In the example shown in FIG. 9-59(I), since the number of small hits in the second reserved memory is 4, the display of the gauge display 076IW021 is started in a mode in which the scales up to the fourth scale are filled. The case is shown.

In addition, in the example shown in FIGS. 9-58 and 9-59, the case where the battle effect is executed in the small hit variation is shown. However, for example, in the case where the battle effect is executed in the big hit variation which is the probability variation big hit, After the effect that the ally character 076IW026 wins the battle in 9-58 (G) is executed, the big hit symbol of the probability variation symbol is finally finally displayed as it is, and the jackpot game based on the probability variation jackpot is started. It will be. Further, for example, in the case of executing a battle effect in a big hit variation that is a normal big hit, after the effect such that the ally character 076IW026 is defeated in the battle is executed instead of the effect of FIG. 9-58(G). , The big hit symbol of the non-probability variation pattern is finally confirmed and displayed, and the big hit game based on the normal big hit is started.

In this example, the case where the battle effect is executed during the high-probability/low-base state (second KT state) is shown, but the present invention is not limited to such an aspect. For example, even in the high probability/high base state (first KT state), the battle effect may be configured to be executable.

Further, in this example, the case where the small hit advance suggestion effect and the small hit number suggestion effect are executed in the high probability/low base state (second KT state) has been shown, but the present invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, even in the high-probability/high-base state (first KT state) or the low-probability/high-base state (first KT state), the small hit advance suggestion effect and the small hit number suggestion effect may be configured to be executable. .

Further, the aspect of the battle effect is not limited to the aspects shown in FIGS. 9-58 (F) and (G). For example, it is configured that there are multiple types of enemy characters in the battle effect, and the proportion of the number of small hits when the small hit number suggestion effect is executed after the victory of the battle effect differs depending on the type of the enemy character that has appeared. You may comprise. Further, for example, the proportion of the number of small hits when the small hit number suggesting effect is executed after winning the battle effect may be configured to be different depending on the effect development of the battle effect (for example, presence or absence of a chance up effect).

Next, while the variable display of one special symbol is being executed, the control of the variable display when a small hit occurs in the variable display of the other special symbol will be described. FIG. 9-60 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the control of the variable display when a small hit occurs in the variable display of the other special symbol during the execution of the variable display of the one special symbol.

During the variable display of the first special symbol that is a big hit, if the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the variable display of the second special symbol, the variable display of the first special symbol is a positive change (in this example, a 10R accurate change) In the case of a big hit variation which is a big hit or 6R probability variation big hit), as shown in FIG. 9-60(A), the variation display of the first special symbol is continued even if the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed. Specifically, during the small hit game, the update of the first variation time timer is interrupted and the variation display of the first special symbol is continuously executed. Then, when the small hit game is finished, the value of the accessory control process flag is again updated to a value corresponding to the accessory control normal process (step S120), and the update of the first variation time timer is restarted (step 076IWS1120A, (See Y in step 076IWS1128A).

On the other hand, when the variation display of the first special symbol is a big hit variation that is a normal big hit (6R normal big hit in this example), as shown in FIG. 9-60(B), the small hit symbol is a stop display. When it is done, the variable display of the first special symbol is also forcibly stopped and displayed as a falling symbol (N in step 076IWS1128A, see step 076IWS1129A).

In addition, when the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the variable display of the second special symbol during the variable display of the first special symbol that is out of sync or small hit, as shown in FIG. 9-60(C), Even if the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed, the variable display of the first special symbol is continued. Specifically, during the small hit game, the update of the first variation time timer is interrupted and the variation display of the first special symbol is continuously executed. Then, when the small hit game is finished, the value of the accessory control process flag is again updated to a value corresponding to the accessory control normal process (step S120), and the update of the first variation time timer is restarted (step 076IWS1120A, Step 076 IWS1127A N).

During the variable display of the second special symbol that becomes a big hit, if the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the variable display of the first special symbol, the variable display of the second special symbol is a positive change. Big hit, 6R certainty variation big hit, or 2R certainty variation big hit) If it is a big hit variation, as shown in FIG. 9-60(D), the variation display of the second special symbol is displayed even if the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed. Is continued. Specifically, during the small hit game, the update of the second variable time timer is interrupted and the variable display of the second special symbol is continuously executed. Then, when the small hit game is finished, the value of the accessory control process flag is again updated to a value corresponding to the accessory control normal process (step S120), and the update of the second variable time timer is restarted (step 076IWS1120B, (See Y in step 076IWS1128B).

On the other hand, if the variable display of the second special symbol is a big hit variation that is a normal big hit (2R normal big hit in this example), as shown in FIG. 9-60(E), the small hit symbol is a stop display. When it is done, the variable display of the second special symbol is also forcibly stopped and displayed in the off symbol (N in step 076IWS1128B, see step 076IWS1129B).

When the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the variable display of the first special symbol during the variable display of the second special symbol which is a small hit, as shown in FIG. 9-60(F), the small hit Even if the symbol is stopped and displayed, the variable display of the second special symbol is continued. Specifically, during the small hit game, the update of the second variable time timer is interrupted and the variable display of the second special symbol is continuously executed. Then, when the small hit game is finished, the value of the accessory control process flag is again updated to a value corresponding to the accessory control normal processing (step S120), and the update of the second variable time timer is restarted (step 076IWS1120B, (See N in step 076IWS1127B).

The control method in the case of a small hit in the variable display of the other special symbol during the execution of the variable display of the one special symbol is not limited to the mode shown in this example. Hereinafter, a modified example of the control method when a small hit occurs in the variable display of the other special symbol while the variable display of the one special symbol is being executed will be described.

(Modification 1)
FIG. 9-61 is a flowchart showing a first special symbol variation process (step S112A) in the first modification. 9-61, the processes of steps 076IWS1120A to S1127A are similar to those shown in FIG. 9-13, but in the first modification, the determination process of step 076IWS1128A shown in FIG. 9-13 does not exist. ..

In Modification 1, if the variable display of the first special symbol that is being executed is a big hit, the CPU 103 directly shifts to the process of step S1129A and transmits the first compulsory symbol determination designation command to the effect control CPU 120. Control is performed (step 076IWS1129A). Note that in FIG. 9-61, the process of step 076IWS1130A is the same as the process shown in FIG. 9-13.

9-62 is a flowchart showing a second special symbol variation process in Modification 1. 9-62, the processes of steps 076IWS1120B to S1127B are similar to those shown in FIG. 9-16, but in the first modification, the determination process of step 076IWS1128B shown in FIG. 9-16 does not exist. .

In the first modification, if the variable display of the second special symbol that is being executed is a big hit, the CPU 103 directly shifts to the process of step S1129B and transmits the second compulsory symbol determination designation command to the effect control CPU 120. Control is performed (step 076IWS1129B). Note that in FIG. 9-62, the process of step 076IWS1130B is the same as the process shown in FIG. 9-16.

FIG. 9-63 is an explanatory diagram for explaining control of variable display when a small hit occurs in variable display of the other special symbol during execution of variable display of one special symbol in the first modification.

During the variable display of the first special symbol that is a big hit, if the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the variable display of the second special symbol, is the variable display of the first special symbol a big variation that is a sure change big hit? Regardless of whether it is a big hit variation that is usually a big hit, as shown in FIG. 9-63(A), when the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed, the variation display of the first special symbol is also forced to be a deviating symbol. It is stopped and displayed (N in step 076IWS1127A, see step 076IWS1129A).

On the other hand, during the variable display of the first special symbol that is out or a small hit, when the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the variable display of the second special symbol, as shown in FIG. 9-63 (B), Even if the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed, the variable display of the first special symbol is continued. Specifically, during the small hit game, the update of the first variation time timer is interrupted and the variation display of the first special symbol is continuously executed. Then, when the small hit game is finished, the value of the accessory control process flag is again updated to a value corresponding to the accessory control normal process (step S120), and the update of the first variation time timer is restarted (step 076IWS1120A, Step 076 IWS1127A N).

During the variable display of the second special symbol that is a big hit, if the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the variable display of the first special symbol, is the variable display of the second special symbol a big variation that is a sure change big hit? Regardless of whether it is a big hit variation that is usually a big hit, as shown in FIG. 9-63 (C), when the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed, the variation display of the second special symbol is also forced to be a deviating symbol. The display is stopped (N in step 076IWS1127B, see step 076IWS1129B).

On the other hand, during the variable display of the second special symbol which is a small hit, when the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the variable display of the first special symbol, as shown in FIG. 9-63(D), the small hit Even if the symbol is stopped and displayed, the variable display of the second special symbol is continued. Specifically, during the small hit game, the update of the second variable time timer is interrupted and the variable display of the second special symbol is continuously executed. Then, when the small hit game is finished, the value of the accessory control process flag is again updated to a value corresponding to the accessory control normal process (step S120), and the update of the second variable time timer is restarted (step 076IWS1120B, (See N in step 076IWS1127B).

(Modification 2)
FIG. 9-64 is a flowchart showing a first special symbol variation process (step S112A) in the second modification. 9-64, the processes of steps 076IWS1120A to S1126A are similar to those shown in FIG. 9-13, but in the modified example 2, the determination process of steps 076IWS1127A and S1128A shown in FIG. 9-13 is performed. Instead, it includes the processing of step 076IWS1127C.

In Modification 2, if the variable display of the first special symbol that is being executed is a big hit, the process is ended as it is. On the other hand, if the variable display of the first special symbol that is being executed is not a big hit, the CPU 103 controls to transmit the first compulsory symbol confirmation designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 076IWS1129A). 9-64, the process of step 076IWS1130A is the same as the process shown in FIG. 9-13.

FIG. 9-65 is a flowchart showing a second special symbol variation process in Modification 2. 9-65, the processes of steps 076IWS1120B to S1126B are similar to those shown in FIG. 9-16, but in the second modification, the determination process of steps 076IWS1127B and S1128B shown in FIG. 9-16 is performed. Instead, it includes the processing of step 076IWS1127D.

In the second modification, if the variable display of the second special symbol that is being executed is a big hit, the process ends. On the other hand, if the variation display of the second special symbol that is being executed is not a big hit, the CPU 103 controls to transmit the second compulsory symbol confirmation designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 076IWS1129B). Note that in FIG. 9-65, the process of step 076IWS1130B is the same as the process shown in FIG. 9-16.

FIG. 9-66 is an explanatory diagram for explaining control of variable display when a small hit occurs in variable display of the other special symbol during execution of variable display of one special symbol in the modified example 2.

During the variable display of the first special symbol that is a big hit, if the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the variable display of the second special symbol, is the variable display of the first special symbol a big variation that is a sure change big hit? Regardless of whether it is a big hit variation that is usually a big hit, as shown in FIG. 9-66(A), the variation display of the first special symbol is continued even if the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed. Specifically, during the small hit game, the update of the first variation time timer is interrupted and the variation display of the first special symbol is continuously executed. Then, when the small hit game is finished, the value of the accessory control process flag is again updated to a value corresponding to the accessory control normal process (step S120), and the update of the first variation time timer is restarted (step 076IWS1120A, (See Y in step 076IWS1127C).

On the other hand, during the variable display of the first special symbol that is out of place or a small hit, when the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the variable display of the second special symbol, as shown in FIG. 9-66(B), When the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed, the variable display of the first special symbol is also forcibly stopped and displayed with the deviating symbol (N in step 076IWS1127C, see step 076IWS1129A).

During the variable display of the second special symbol that is a big hit, if the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the variable display of the first special symbol, is the variable display of the second special symbol a big variation that is a sure change big hit? Regardless of whether it is a big hit variation that is usually a big hit, as shown in FIG. 9-66(C), the variation display of the second special symbol is continued even if the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed. Specifically, during the small hit game, the update of the second variable time timer is interrupted and the variable display of the second special symbol is continuously executed. Then, when the small hit game is finished, the value of the accessory control process flag is again updated to a value corresponding to the accessory control normal processing (step S120), and the update of the second variable time timer is restarted (step 076IWS1120B, (See Y in step 076IWS1127D).

On the other hand, during the variable display of the second special symbol which is a small hit, when the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the variable display of the first special symbol, as shown in FIG. 9-66(D), the small hit When the symbol is stopped and displayed, the variable display of the second special symbol is also forcibly stopped and displayed with the symbol (step 076IWS1127D, N, see step 076IWS1129B).

Further, as a control method in the case where a small hit occurs in the variable display of the other special symbol while the variable display of the one special symbol is being executed, other than those shown in the modified examples 1 and 2, for example, When the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the variable display of the second special symbol during the variable display of the first special symbol, the forced stop is stopped, while the variable display of the first special symbol that is the small hit is displayed. When the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the variable display of the second special symbol, the variation may be continued.

Also, for example, when the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the variable display of the second special symbol during the variable display of the first special symbol which is the 10R certainty variable jackpot, the forced stop is stopped while the 2R certainty variation jackpot is the first. When the small hitting symbol is stopped and displayed in the variable display of the second special symbol during the variable display of the 1 special symbol, the variation may be continued.

Further, for example, during the normal state (low probability / low base state), when the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the variable display of the first special symbol, the variable display of the second special symbol that is being executed is deviated and changed, Either the small hit variation or the big hit variation may be configured to be forcedly stopped. With such a configuration, in this example, when the variable display is completed 50 times in the low-probability/high-base state, the state transitions to the low-probability/low-base state (see FIG. 9-22). When 1 to 4 second reserved memories are accumulated when the variable display is ended and the state is shifted to the low probability/low base state, and there is a second reserved memory that is a big hit, it is forced to stop. As a result, it is possible to prevent a big hit at an unintended timing. Further, in particular, in the gaming machine configured to be controllable in the KT state as in this example, by performing a right-handed operation in a normal state (low probability/low base state), a second starting winning opening for easy starting winning is obtained. It is also possible to use a strategy that allows a winning prize to be started and a variable display of the second special symbol to be displayed, and a winning prize to be started at the first start winning a prize port and a variable display of the first special symbol to be performed. It is effective as a method prevention measure.

As described above, various modes are conceivable as a control method when a small hit occurs in the variable display of the other special symbol while the variable display of the one special symbol is being executed.

(Modification 3)
Further, in the characteristic portion 076IW, when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed and when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, the control for forcibly stopping the off symbol is performed by the same control. Although the case (see FIG. 9-60) is shown, different controls may be used. FIG. 9-67 is a flowchart showing a second special symbol variation process in Modification 3. In the modified example 3, the first special symbol variation process is the same as the process shown in FIG. 9-13. 9-67, the processes of steps 076IWS1120B to S1125B are similar to those shown in FIG. 9-16, but in the third modification, the determination processes of steps 076IWS1126B to S1128B shown in FIG. 9-16 are performed. not exist. Therefore, in Modification 3, if the big hit symbol is not derived and displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A (N in step 076IWS1125B), the CPU 103 ends the process as it is.

FIG. 9-68 is an explanatory diagram for explaining control of variable display when a small hit occurs in variable display of the other special symbol during execution of variable display of one special symbol in Modification 3.

As shown in FIGS. 9-68 (A) and (C), in the third modification, the small hit in the variable display of the second special symbol during the variable display of the first special symbol that becomes the deviance, the small hit, and the probability variation big hit. When the symbols are stopped and displayed, the variable display of the first special symbol is continued even when the small hit symbols are stopped and displayed, as in FIGS. 9-60 (A) and (C). Further, as shown in FIGS. 9-68 (D) and (F), during the variable display of the second special symbol which is a small hit or a probability variation big hit, the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the variable display of the first special symbol. In this case, similarly to FIGS. 9-60(D) and (F), the variable display of the second special symbol is continued even if the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 9-68(B), in Modification 3, when the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the variable display of the second special symbol during the variable display of the first special symbol which is usually the big hit, In the same manner as in FIG. 9-60(B), when the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed, the variable display of the first special symbol is also forcibly stopped and displayed as a falling symbol.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 9-68(E), in Modification 3, when the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the variable display of the first special symbol during the variable display of the second special symbol which is usually the big hit, In contrast to FIG. 9-60(E), the variable display of the second special symbol is continued even if the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed.

As shown in FIG. 9-68, in the modified example 3, the variation display of the first special symbol is executed and the variation display of the second special symbol is executed. The control to stop and display is different.

In the modified example 3, when the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the variable display of the second special symbol while the variable display of the first special symbol, which is normally the big hit, is being executed, the normal big hit is stopped. While the variable display of the first special symbol is displayed during the variable display of the second special symbol, when the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed, it is shown that the variable display is continued, but only in such a mode. Absent. For example, conversely, when the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the variable display of the second special symbol while the variable display of the first special symbol that is normally a big hit is being executed, the variable display is continued, while the normal big hit is When the small hitting symbol is stopped and displayed in the variable display of the first special symbol during the execution of the variable display of the second special symbol, it may be configured to be forcedly stopped. Further, for example, (regardless of whether it is a probable big hit or a normal big hit) When the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the variable indication of the second special symbol while the variable indication of the first special symbol which is a big hit is being executed, it is forcibly removed. While stopping, regardless of whether it is a big jackpot or a normal jackpot, it changes when the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the variable display of the first special symbol while the variable display of the second special symbol that is a big hit is being executed. The display may be continued. As such, in some form, when performing the variable display of the first special symbol and when performing the variable display of the second special symbol, the control for forced disengagement stop may be different.

(Modification 4)
FIG. 9-69 is a flowchart showing a first special symbol variation process (step S112A) in Modification 4. 9-69, the processes of steps 076IWS1120A to S1128A are the same as those shown in FIG. 9-13.

In Modification 4, in step 076IWS1128A, neither the 10R probability big hit nor the 6R probability big hit (that is, the 6R normal big hit) is the variable display of the first special symbol being executed, and the CPU 103 sets the probability change flag. It is confirmed whether or not it is set (step 076IWS1131A). If the probability variation flag is not set (that is, if it is not the probability variation state), the process is ended as it is. If the probability variation flag is set (that is, if the probability variation state), the CPU 103 controls to transmit the first compulsory symbol determination designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 076IWS1129A). Note that the processing of step 076IWS1130A is the same as the processing shown in FIG. 9-13.

In the modified example 4, when the determination process of step 076IWS1131A is executed, during the variable display of the first special symbol that is usually a big hit, when the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the variable display of the second special symbol, The variable display of the first special symbol is not forcibly stopped and displayed as a deviating symbol, but the variable display of the first special symbol is forcibly stopped and displayed as a deviating symbol when the probability change state is in progress. On the other hand, even during the variable display of the first special symbol that is usually a big hit, if the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed, the variable display of the second special symbol is continued unless it is in the probability change state.

FIG. 9-70 is a flowchart showing a second special symbol variation process in Modification 4. 9-70, the processes of steps 076IWS1120B to S1128B are the same as those shown in FIG. 9-16.

In Modification 4, in step 076IWS1128B, the variable display of the first special symbol which is neither the 10R certainty variation jackpot, the 6R certainty variation jackpot, nor the 2R certainty variation jackpot (that is, the 2R normal jackpot) is being executed, the CPU 103 Confirms whether or not the probability variation flag is set (step 076IWS1131B). If the probability variation flag is not set (that is, if it is not the probability variation state), the process is ended as it is. If the probability variation flag is set (that is, if the probability variation state), the CPU 103 controls to transmit the second compulsory symbol determination designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 076IWS1129B). The process of step 076IWS1130B is the same as the process shown in FIG. 9-16.

In Modification 4, by executing the determination process of step 076IWS1131B, when the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the variable display of the first special symbol during the variable display of the second special symbol which is usually the big hit, The variable display of the second special symbol is not forcibly stopped and displayed with the deviating symbol, but the variable display of the second special symbol is forcibly stopped and displayed with the deviating symbol when the probability change state is in progress. On the other hand, even during the variation display of the second special symbol that is usually a big hit, if the small variation symbol is stopped and displayed, the variation display of the first special symbol is continued unless it is in the probability variation state.

In Modification 4, the case is shown in which control is forcibly stopped and displayed with a deviating symbol depending on whether the probability variation flag is set (whether or not it is in the probability variation state), but only in such a mode. I can't. For example, it may be configured to perform control to forcibly stop and display a symbol depending on whether or not the special drawing time saving flag is set. Further, for example, only in the high-probability/low-base state (the high-probability flag is on, the high-base flag is off), the control for forcibly stopping and displaying the symbol may be performed. As such, it may be configured in any form so as to perform control to forcibly stop and display the symbol according to the current game state.

In addition, as described above, when configured to perform control to forcibly stop and display with a symbol only in the high probability/low base state, it is possible to prevent a big jackpot from being normally displayed on the variable display of one identification information, It is possible to prevent the second KT state (small hit RUSH) from being interrupted.

Further, in this example, the case where the small hit number suggesting effect is configured to be executable as the effect effect of the battle effect is shown (see FIGS. 9-58 and 9-59), but the present invention is not limited to such an aspect. For example, the production of the common mode is executed in the second KT state and the other game states, and in the cases other than the second KT state, a result suggesting the possibility of a big hit is displayed as the production result of the production of the common mode. In the 2KT state, the small hit number suggesting effect may be executed as the effect result of the effect in the common mode. Hereinafter, a modified example 5 in which the roulette effect in the common mode is executed in the second KT state and the other game states will be described.

FIG. 9-71 is an explanatory diagram for describing a production mode of roulette production in the fifth modification. In Modified Example 5, as shown in FIG. 9-71(A), the roulette effect display area provided on the display screen of the image display device 5 regardless of the second KT state or the game state other than that. In 076IW030, the roulette effect is started in a mode in which the roulette is scroll-displayed in the common effect mode. Next, in the case of a game state other than the second KT state (for example, a low probability/low base state (normal state)), when the display timing of the effect result comes, as shown in FIG. 9-71 (B1), for example, In the roulette effect display area 076IW030, a character display 076IW031 such as "intense heat" is displayed as an effect result, and an effect result suggesting a big hit may be displayed. On the other hand, in the case of the second KT state, at the display timing of the effect result, as shown in FIG. 9-71 (B2), for example, in the roulette effect display area 076IW030, a character display 076IW032 such as “small 4” is displayed. An effect result that is displayed as an effect result and suggests (notifies) that there are four second holding memories that are small hits is displayed.

In addition, the aspect of the roulette effect is not limited to the aspect shown in this example, for example, when the roulette effect is executed in the game state other than the second KT state, "chance" is given as an effect result that suggests a big hit. Alternatively, the display mode of the hold display may be changed by displaying a character display such as or "Opportunity" or by performing a display indicating that the display mode of the hold display changes.

Further, not only in the mode shown in FIG. 9-71, for example, when the roulette effect is executed in the KT state including the first KT state and the second KT state, not only in the second KT state, a small roulette effect is produced as a result. The hit count suggestion effect may be executed, and when the roulette effect is executed in the other normal state, the result suggesting the possibility of a big hit may be displayed, and various modes are possible.

Further, in the present example, the case where the number of the second holding storages that are small hits is notified by displaying the gauge is shown, but the present invention is not limited to such a mode. Hereinafter, a modified example 6 for notifying the number of small hits will be described. FIG. 9-72 is an explanatory diagram for describing a notification mode of the number of small hits in the sixth modification.

In the example shown in FIG. 9-72(A), three small hit icons 076IW041 are displayed on the left side of the image display device 5 on the basis that the number of the second reserved memories for small hits is three. The case is shown. After that, each time a small hit occurs, the displayed small hit icon 076IW041 is deleted one by one. As described above, instead of the gauge display, the number of the second pending storage for the small hit may be notified by the number of small hit icons 076IW041.

In the example shown in FIG. 9-72(B), based on the number of the second reserved memories that are small hits being 3, the predetermined count number display area 076IW042 is displayed with “3” on the left side of the image display device 5. "Is displayed. After that, each time a small hit occurs, the count numbers displayed in the count number display area 076IW042 are sequentially updated to “2”, “1”, and “0”. As described above, instead of the gauge display, a countdown display displayed in the count number display area 076IW042 may be used to notify the number of the second pending storage that is a small hit.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 9-72(A), when it is configured to display a small hit icon indicating a small hit, it may be changed from a small hit icon to a large hit icon indicating a big hit. You may. In this case, for example, when the big hit icon is changed, the big hit icons for the number of rounds during the big hit game may be displayed to suggest (notify) the number of rounds of the big hit.

As described above, according to the characteristic part 076IW, it is possible to control to a special state (for example, a small hit game state) different from the advantageous state (for example, a big hit game state), and a non-special state (for example, a low hit state). It is possible to control to a special state (for example, high probability/low base state (second KT state)) that is controlled to be a special state more frequently than probability/low base state (normal state)). In addition, in the special state, a pre-suggestion effect that suggests in advance that there is a pending storage corresponding to the control in the special state (for example, FIG. 9-55 (F), FIG. The small hit advance suggestion effect shown in −57(F) can be executed, and the number suggestion effect suggesting the number of times the special state is controlled based on the execution of the advance suggestion effect (for example, FIG. 9- 55(G), FIG. 9-56(G), and FIG. 9-57(G)). Further, it is possible to execute advance suggestion effects (for example, small hit advance suggestion effects A to C) by a plurality of types of execution modes. Further, as an execution pattern of the number of times suggesting effects, at least a first pattern (for example, "small hit +2 times!" or "small" suggesting that the special state is controlled a first number of times (for example, 2 or 3 times). A character display such as “win +3 times!” and a second pattern (for example, “small hit +4 times”) that suggests that the special state is controlled a second number of times (for example, 4 times) that is greater than the first number of times. Characters such as "!" are displayed) and the number suggestion production can be executed. In addition, the proportion of which execution pattern the number of times suggestive effect is to be executed differs depending on the execution mode of the prior suggestion effect (for example, as shown in FIG. 9-43, the small hit advance suggestion effect A is executed. If the small hit number 2 is high, the small hit advance suggestion effect B is executed, the small hit number 3 is high, and if the small hit advance suggestion effect C is executed, the small hit number is 4 ratio. Is high). Therefore, since the effect patterns in the special state can be diversified, the effect regarding the period controlled in the special state can be improved and the interest in the game can be improved.

In this example, the small hit advance suggestion effect is executed at the timing when the number of small hits being notified becomes 0, but the present invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, a small hit advance suggestion effect is executed before the number of small hits being notified becomes 0 (for example, an operation incentive display prompting the operation of the operation means is performed), and a small hit number suggestion effect or a pre-reading effect of a gauge display is provided. It may be configured to execute the small hit advance suggestion effect.

Further, according to the characteristic part 076IW, it is possible to display a specific display (for example, a gauge display 076IW021) corresponding to the number of times of controlling the special state suggested in the number suggesting effect. Therefore, since the effect patterns in the special state can be diversified, the effect regarding the period controlled in the special state can be improved and the interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, according to the feature part 076IW, it is possible to display a specific display (for example, a gauge display 076IW021) corresponding to the number of times the special state is suggested in the suggestion for number of times, and when the special state is controlled, The specific display is changed in response to the control to the special state (for example, as shown in FIG. 9-54, the scale of the gauge display 076IW021 is decreased by one each time a small hit occurs). Further, when the number of times the special state suggested by the specific display is controlled is small, it is possible to execute the number suggestion effect at a higher rate than when the number of times the special state suggested by the specific display is controlled is large (for example, Since the small hit number suggesting effect is executed when the number of small hits notified by the gauge display 076IW021 becomes 0, the smaller the number of small hits suggested (notifying) by the small hit number suggesting effect is the smaller hit. The frequency suggestion production is frequently executed). Therefore, the interest in the game can be improved by executing the notification according to the situation. For example, when the number of small hits is small, the execution ratio of the small hit number suggesting effect is set to be higher, so that the player can be effectively encouraged and the interest in the game can be improved.

In this example, the case where the small hit number suggesting effect is executed when the number of small hits being notified becomes 0 has been shown, but the present invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, even when the number of small hits being notified is 1, 2, or 3, the small hit number suggestion effect may be executed to additionally display the number of small hits being notified. In this case, when the number of small hits being informed is as small as 1, the execution frequency of the small hit number suggesting effect is increased as compared with the case where the number of small hits being informed is large as 2 or 3. The number of small hits may be easily increased.

Further, according to the feature part 076IW, a specific effect (for example, the battle effect shown in FIGS. 9-58 (F) and (G)) can be executed as the pre-indication effect. Further, as a result of the specific effect, it is possible to execute whether or not it is controlled to an advantageous state or to suggest the number of times (for example, when a battle effect (win) is executed with a change in a big hit, it is a probability variation big hit). Is notified and the battle effect (victory) is executed due to the small hit variation, the small hit number suggesting effect is executed). Therefore, since the effect patterns in the special state can be diversified, the effect regarding the period controlled in the special state can be improved and the interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, in the characteristic part 076IW, a case is shown in which one of the notification of whether or not the probability variation is a big hit and the suggestion of the number of small hits is executed in the battle effect. It may be configured such that both the notification as to whether or not the probability variation is a big hit in the battle effect and the small hit number suggestion effect can be executed. With such a configuration, a specific effect (for example, the battle effect shown in FIGS. 9-58 (F) and (G)) can be executed as the pre-indication effect. In addition, as a result of the specific effect, it is possible to execute whether or not it is controlled in an advantageous state and the number of times suggestive effect. Therefore, since the effect patterns in the special state can be diversified, the effect regarding the period controlled in the special state can be improved and the interest in the game can be improved.

Further, according to the characteristic part 076IW, in the non-special state, it is possible to execute an advantageous state suggesting effect (for example, a button notice effect) that indicates the possibility of being controlled to the advantageous state. Further, the execution mode including at least the first element (for example, the operation prompting display of the blue display color) and the second element (for example, the red display color of the red display color) which is highly likely to be controlled in an advantageous state than the first element. The advantageous state suggesting effect (for example, the button notice effect A, B) can be executed by the execution mode including the operation promotion display. Further, the advance suggestion effect (for example, the small hit advance suggestion effects B and C) can be executed by the execution mode including at least the first element and the execution mode including the second element. Further, when the pre-indication effect is executed by the execution mode including the second element, the special suggestion control is performed at a higher rate in the frequency suggestion effect than when the pre-indication effect is executed by the execution mode including the first element. A large number of times is suggested as the number of times to be performed (for example, as shown in FIG. 9-43, if the small hit advance suggestion effect B is executed, the ratio of the small hit number 3 is high, and the small hit advance suggestion effect C is If it is executed, the ratio of four small pieces is high). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from betraying the expectation and improve the interest in the game.

In addition, according to the characteristic part 076IW, it is possible to execute a special effect (for example, the roulette effect shown in FIG. 9-71) including an effect mode common to the non-special state and the special state. Further, in the non-special state, it is possible to execute the special effect including the effect result (for example, the character display 076IW031 such as “intense heat” shown in FIG. 9-71 (B1)) suggesting the possibility of being controlled to the advantageous state. Yes, in a special state, a special effect can be executed as a preliminary suggestion effect, and a special effect including the number suggestion effect as a result (for example, a character display 076IW032 such as “small 4” shown in FIG. 9-71 (B2)). Is feasible. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the data capacity by making the production materials common.

In addition, in this example, the case where the special effect is the roulette effect is shown, but the effect is not limited to such a mode, and if the effect includes a common effect mode in the normal state and the second KT state, for example, the roulette effect. It may be configured to execute effects other than.

Further, according to the characteristic part 076IW, it is possible to set any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting values “1” to “6”) having different advantages for the player. In addition, it is possible to control in an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player (for example, a big hit game state), and it is possible to control to a special state (for example, a small hit game state) that is a state different from the advantageous state. It is possible to control to a special state (for example, KT state) where value is easily added. Then, in response to the game medium (for example, a game ball) passing through a specific area (for example, a special winning opening), a setting suggestive effect (for example, a small hit winning suggestion effect) can be executed. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the setting suggestion production.

Specifically, in this example, the suggestion at the time of winning the small hit can be executed based on the fact that the game ball has won the special winning opening during the high probability/second KT state (small hit RUSH). However, during the small hit RUSH, the frequency of winning the special winning opening is particularly high, so the setting suggestive effect (in this example, the suggestive effect at the time of winning the small hit) can be paid attention to, and the interest of the setting suggestive effect is improved. be able to.

In this example, the case where the setting suggestion effect (in this example, the small hit prize suggestion effect) is executed based on the fact that the game ball has won the special winning opening as the specific area is shown. I can't stop. For example, even if it is configured to be able to execute the setting suggestion effect based on the winning of the game ball to the start winning hole (the winning ball device 6A, the variable winning ball device 6B), the general winning hole 10 and the special winning hole as the specific area. Good. Further, the setting suggestion effect may be configured to be executable based on the entry of the game ball into the outlet as the specific area. Further, for example, the setting suggestion effect may be configured to be executable based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the gates such as the passage gate 41 as the specific area.

Further, according to the characteristic part 076IW, it is possible to set any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting values “1” to “6”) having different advantages for the player. In addition, it is possible to control in an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player (for example, a big hit game state), and it is possible to control to a special state (for example, a small hit game state) that is a state different from the advantageous state. It is possible to control to a special state (for example, KT state) where value is easily added. Further, it is possible to execute a setting suggestion effect (for example, a prize ball number indication suggestion effect), and the easiness of execution of the setting suggestion effect differs depending on the length of the period in which the special state is controlled (for example, FIG. As shown in, when the number of prize balls reaches 456, it is possible to execute the prize ball number indicating suggestion effect A with a probability of 3%, and when the number of prize balls reaches 555, there is a probability of 2%. The number display suggesting effect B can be executed, the prize ball number indicating suggestion effect C can be executed with a probability of 1% when the number of prize balls reaches 666, and 5 when the number of prize balls reaches 2456. It is possible to execute the award ball number display suggesting effect D with a probability of %, and to execute the award ball number indicating suggestion effect E with a probability of 3% when the number of award balls reaches 2555, and the award ball number of 2666. When the number of individual balls is reached, there is a 2% probability that the prize ball number display suggestive effect F can be executed). Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the setting suggestion production.

In this example, the timing when the number of prize balls reaches 456, 555, 666, 2456, 2555, and 2666 as "the length of the period controlled in the special state" (in other words, A case is shown in which the award ball number display suggesting effect is executed during a period until a certain specific game value is given), but the present invention is not limited to such an aspect. For example, "the length of the period controlled to the special state" is controlled to the length of the period controlled to the advantageous state (the big hit gaming state in this example) or the special state (the small hit gaming state in this example) It may be the length of a given period, or the length of these total periods.

Further, when the length of the period controlled to an advantageous state (for example, the big hit game state) is used as the "length of the period controlled to the special state", the length of the period from the fanfare of the big hit game to the ending is used. Alternatively, the length of the period of only the round game during the big hit game may be used. In this case, for example, the big hit with a longer period from the fanfare of the big hit game to the ending may be configured to execute the prize ball number display suggesting effect at a higher rate. Further, for example, in the case of a big hit with a small number of rounds during a big hit game, the prize ball number display suggesting effect may be executed at a higher rate than a big hit with a large number of rounds.

In addition, for example, as the “length of the period controlled in the special state”, the number of small hits that occur during the high probability/second KT state, or the number of times the variable display is performed during the high probability/second KT state is executed. Accordingly, the award ball number display suggesting effect may be configured to be executed. In this case, for example, the higher the number of small hits, the higher the proportion of the prize ball display suggesting effects may be executed, or the larger the number of times the variable display is executed, the higher the proportion of the prize ball display suggesting effects may be executed. .. Further, for example, the award ball number indication suggestion effect may be executed at a high rate at the timing when the high probability/second KT state (small hit RUSH) ends, and the “length of period controlled to special state” may be varied. Various modes are possible.

Generally, in a gaming machine, when a certain number of prize balls is reached and a display such as "XXXXX" is displayed, "1000 OVER" of the prize ball number emphasis effect shown in this example or It is displayed in units with a certain limit, such as in units of 1000 prize balls such as "2000 OVER". On the other hand, the prize ball number indication suggestion effect shown in this example is a timing different from the normal timing of the number of prize balls reaching 456, 555, 666, 2456, 2555 and 2666. Since it is executed in, it is possible to expect a high setting while giving a sense of incongruity to the generation timing of the award ball number indication suggestive effect, and it is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game.

Further, according to the characteristic part 076IW, when the specific display result (for example, the big hit symbol) is derived and displayed as the display result of the variable display, it is possible to control to the advantageous state (for example, the big hit game state). Further, when a special display result (for example, a small hitting pattern) different from the specific display result is displayed as a variable display result, it is possible to control to a special state (for example, a small hitting game state). Further, the display result of the variable display is determined by using the determination value for determining the display result of the variable display (for example, the determination value for the big hit determination, the determination value for the small hit determination). The judgment value includes a specific judgment value (for example, a judgment value for jackpot judgment) for deciding to display the specific display result as the display result of the variable display, and a special display result as the display result of the variable display. And a special determination value (for example, a determination value for a small hit determination) for determining to derive and display. Further, it can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values having different numbers of specific determination values (for example, setting values “1” to “6”). Further, the number of special determination values is common regardless of the set value (see FIGS. 9-1 and 9-2). Therefore, it is possible to realize appropriate game playability.

In addition, according to this feature section 076IW, setting suggestion production can be executed in response to the control to the special state (for example, a small hit occurs during the high probability/second KT state, and a game ball is won in the special winning opening. Based on the above, it is possible to carry out a small hit winning suggestion effect and a prize ball number indication suggesting effect). Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the setting suggestion effect in association with the control to the special state.

In this example, the case where the setting suggestion effect (in this example, the suggestion effect at the time of winning the small hit, the indication suggestion of the number of prize balls) is executed based on the fact that the game ball has won the special winning opening, is shown. However, it is not limited to such an aspect. For example, while the small hit is changing, or when the special variable winning ball device 17 is controlled to the open state, the setting suggestion effect may be executed at the start of the small hit game. Further, for example, the setting suggestion effect may be executed by changing the small hit notification mode when a small hit occurs. In this way, any form may be used as long as the setting suggestion effect is executed in response to the control for the small hit.

According to the characteristic part 076IW, the variable means (for example, the special variable winning ball device 7, the special variable winning ball device 17) is played when it is controlled to the advantageous state and the special state. A medium (for example, a game ball) can be controlled into an easy-to-enter state (for example, open state) in which entry is easy and an inaccessible state (for example, closed state) where entry is difficult or impossible. Further, the setting suggestion effect can be executed in response to the variable means being controlled to be in the easy entry state (for example, the special variable winning ball device 7 and the special variable winning ball device 17 are in the open state and are large. Based on the occurrence of winning game balls to the winning opening and special winning opening, it is possible to execute suggestion production at the time of winning the small hit and display suggestion of the number of prize balls). Therefore, the interest of the setting suggestion effect can be improved in association with the control of the variable means.

In this example, in the case of executing the setting suggestion effect (in this example, the suggestion effect at the time of winning the small hit, the indication suggestion of the number of prize balls) based on the fact that the game ball has won the big prize hole or the special prize hole. However, it is not limited to such an embodiment. For example, when executing the opening effect when the special variable winning ball device 7 or the special variable winning ball device 17 is controlled to be in the open state, the setting suggestion effect is executed by changing the effect mode of the opening effect. It may be configured as follows. In this way, the setting suggesting effect may be executed in any form in response to the variable means being controlled to the easy entry state.

In addition, according to this feature section 076IW, when the control of the game state is switched (for example, at the start or end of the big hit game, when transitioning from the low probability/first KT state to the normal state (low probability/low base state) ), the setting suggesting effect can be executed (for example, the display mode (for example, display color) of the right-handed display is changed in step 076IWS624). Therefore, the interest of the setting suggestion effect can be improved in association with the switching of the control of the game state.

In this example, as "when the control of the game state is switched", when the big hit game starts or ends, when the low probability/first KT state shifts to the normal state (low probability/low base state), it is set Although the case where the suggestive effect is configured to be executable is shown, the invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, during the high probability/second KT state (small hit RUSH) during the big hit game transition, or from the big hit game to the high base state (high probability/first KT state or low probability/first KT state) The setting suggestion effect may be configured to be executable during the effect period. Further, for example, a gaming machine configured to perform a variable display a predetermined number of times during a high base state or to shift to a high probability/second KT state (small hit RUSH) based on occurrence of a predetermined number of small hits. In, in the production period when transitioning from the high base state to the high probability/second KT state (small hit RUSH), the setting suggestion production may be configured to be executable, and various settings may be made as “when the control of the game state is switched”. Various modes are possible.

Further, in this example, the case where the setting suggestion effect is executed by changing the display mode of the right-handed display or the left-handed display is shown, but the present invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, the setting suggestion effect may be executed by changing the effect mode of the fanfare effect at the start of the big hit or the ending effect at the end of the big hit, and various modes are possible.

Further, according to the characteristic part 076IW, according to the number of times of control to the special state during the special state, the total game value given by the special state during the special state, or the number of executions of the variable display during the special state, It is possible to execute the setting suggestion effect with different selection ratios (for example, when the number of prize balls reaches 456, 555, 666, 2456, 2555, or 2666), different selection ratios are used. The number-of-spheres display suggestive effects A to F are executed, or, for example, according to the number of small hits that occur during the high probability/second KT state, or the number of times the variable display is executed during the high probability/second KT state. Alternatively, the prize ball number display suggestive effects A to F may be executed at different selection rates. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the setting suggestion effect in association with the number of times of control to the special state, the total game value, or the number of times of variable display execution.

Further, according to the characteristic part 076IW, as the special state, there are an advantageous special state (for example, the second KT state), and a disadvantageous special state (for example, the first KT state) that is more disadvantageous to the player than the advantageous special state. Controllable. Further, it is possible to execute the setting suggestion effect with different selection ratios when the game medium passes through the specific area during the advantageous special state and when the game medium passes through the specific area during the disadvantageous special state (for example, Only when the game ball is a small hit in the second KT state and a special winning hole is won in the special winning opening, the suggestion effect at the time of winning the small hit and the suggestion effect for displaying the number of prize balls can be executed). Therefore, the interest of the setting suggestion effect can be improved in association with the type of special state.

In this example, only when the game ball is won in the special winning opening during the second KT state, the small hit winning suggestion effect and the prize ball number indication suggesting effect are configured to be executable. It is not limited to various forms. For example, even when a game ball is won in the special winning opening during the first KT state, it is configured to be able to execute the small hit winning suggestion effect and the prize ball number indication suggesting effect, and the special winning opening during the second KT state. Depending on whether it is a prize or a game ball is won in the special winning opening during the first KT state, it is possible to execute the small hit winning suggestion effect and the prize ball number indication suggesting effect at different ratios. You may comprise. In addition, for example, even when an irregular game ball is won in the special winning opening during the non-KT state, the small hit winning suggestion effect and the prize ball number display suggesting effect may be executed. ..

In the case of the above-mentioned configuration, when a special winning opening or irregular winning occurs in the first KT state (high base state), or when a special winning opening occurs in the second KT state Compared with the above, it may be configured to execute the small hitting prize suggestion effect and the prize ball count indication suggestion effect at a higher rate, or the small hit prize suggestion effect and the prize ball number indication suggestion effect at a lower rate. It may be configured to do so.

In addition, in the feature part 076IW, the value of the prize ball number counter and the prize ball number display during the big hit game based on the 10R sure-change big hit, the 6R sure-change big hit, and the 6R normal big hit and the high probability/second KT state (small hit RUSH) Is updated and the value of the prize ball number counter is not updated during the big hit game based on the 2R probability change hit and the 2R normal big hit and during the high base state (high probability/first KT state, low probability/first KT state). In principle, the prize ball number display is hidden and the variable display is terminated 50 times in the low probability/first KT state and the normal state (low probability/low base state) is reached. The case where control is performed so as to reset the value of the prize ball number counter at the time of transition has been described, but the present invention is not limited to such an aspect. The value of the prize ball number counter may be updated even during a big hit game based on the 2R probability varying big hit or the 2R normal big hit.

In addition, in the present example, due to the above-described configuration, for example, the high probability/second KT state (small hit RUSH) is ended and the high base state (high probability/first KT state, low probability/first KT state). State)), if a high probability 10R probability variation big hit or 2R probability variation big hit occurs in the high base state and it shifts to the high probability/second KT state (small hit RUSH) again, the prize in the previous small hit RUSH It is possible to update the value of the prize ball number counter while displaying the number of balls and display the prize ball number display.

Further, not only in the mode of displaying the number of prize balls as shown in this example, for example, when the probability of 10R probability variation is a big hit and the high probability/second KT state (small hit RUSH) is entered, the high probability/second KT state is displayed. The (small hit RUSH) state and the big hit game immediately before that may be set as one section, and the number of prize balls in the section may be totaled to display the total value. Further, for example, the setting suggestion effect suggesting the current setting value may be executed by changing the display mode (display color in this example) of the totalized value.

In addition, in the feature part 076IW, as the "setting suggestion effect", a small hit winning prize suggestion effect and an award ball number indication suggestion effect in a mode in which the current setting value indicates any one of the setting values "1" to "6". However, the present invention is not limited to such an aspect. For example, instead of suggesting the current setting value, setting suggestion production may be executed in a mode that suggests whether or not a setting change that changes the setting value when the power is turned on to the gaming machine is suggested. Good. In this way, the “setting suggestion effect” may be something that makes a suggestion about the setting in some form.

Further, according to the feature unit 076IW, the variable display of the first identification information (for example, the first special symbol) and the variable display of the second identification information (for example, the second special symbol) can be executed in parallel. , It is possible to control to an advantageous state (eg, big hit game state) advantageous to the player when a specific display result (eg, big hit pattern) is derived and displayed as the display result of the variable display, and is special as a display result of the variable display. It is possible to control to a special state (for example, a small hitting game state) different from the advantageous state when the display result (for example, a small hitting pattern) is derived and displayed. Further, the specific display result includes a first specific display result (for example, a probability variation big hit symbol) and a second specific display result (for example, a normal big hit symbol), and the one in which the first specific display result is derived and displayed is It is more advantageous for the player than the second specific display result is derived and displayed (for example, the probability change state is controlled after the big hit game is finished). Further, while the variable display of one of the first identification information and the second identification information, which is the variable display corresponding to the first specific display result, is being performed, the special display result is displayed in the variable display of the other identification information. Based on the derived display, the display result of the variable display of the one identification information is not derived and displayed (for example, the update of the first variable time timer or the second variable time timer is interrupted, and the first special symbol or the first special symbol or 2 The variable display of special symbols is continuously executed). In addition, during the variable display of the identification information of one of the first identification information and the second identification information and the variable display corresponding to the second specific display result, the special display result is displayed in the variable display of the other identification information. Based on the derived display, the one variable display of the identification information is derived and displayed with a predetermined display result (for example, a deviating symbol) (for example, the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is deviating and is a symbol. It will be forced to stop). Therefore, control that considers the degree of advantage of the display result of the variable display can be realized.

Specifically, when the normal big hit (non-probable strange big hit) is displayed in the variable display corresponding to the remaining suspension of one of the identification information, even though the second KT state (small hit RUSH) or the positive change state is entered, The second KT state (small hit RUSH) or the probability variation state will end immediately, and there is a risk that the interest in the game will decrease. On the other hand, if the variation display corresponding to the remaining suspension of the identification information on one side is forcibly and uniformly discontinued and the symbol is stopped and displayed (forcibly disengaged), even if the variation display is a certainty big hit, it will be disengaged. As a result, the game value given to the player in the advantageous state (big hit game state) is reduced, which is not preferable. Therefore, in this feature part 076IW, while the fluctuation display that is a normal big hit (non-probability variation big hit) is forcibly disengaged, the fluctuation display (the measurement of the fluctuation time is interrupted) is performed for the fluctuation display that is a probability big jackpot. , It is possible to improve the interest in the game while suppressing the decrease in the game value given to the player.

In this example, as a mode that "variable display of one identification information is not stopped", the update of the first variation time timer or the second variation time timer is interrupted, and the variation display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is displayed. However, the present invention is not limited to such an aspect. For example, the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is interrupted (temporarily stopped), and the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol that has been interrupted after the small hit game is configured to be restarted. You may. It is only necessary that the variable display is not completely stopped in some form.

Further, according to the characteristic part 076IW, it is possible to control to a special state (for example, the second KT state) in which a game value (for example, a prize ball) due to the special state is easily given. Therefore, by providing a situation in which a game value is likely to be imparted due to the special state, it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

In addition, according to the feature unit 076IW, a specific state (for example, a high probability state (probability change) that is a state different from the advantageous state and is easily controlled to be in the advantageous state as compared with a non-specific state (for example, a low probability state). State)). Further, the first specific display result is derived and displayed, and is controlled to a specific state (for example, the probability variation state is controlled after the jackpot game based on the probability variation jackpot), and the second specific display result is derived and displayed. Based on the fact, it controls to a non-specific state (for example, it does not control to a probability changing state after the end of the big hit game based on the normal big hit). Therefore, it is possible to realize the control in consideration of whether the control is performed in the specific state.

Further, according to the characteristic part 076IW, the special display result can be derived and displayed regardless of whether the variable display of the first identification information is performed or the variable display of the second identification information is performed ( 9-1 and 9-2). Further, based on the fact that the special display result is derived and displayed in the variable display of the second identification information while the variable display of the first identification information is performed corresponding to the second specific display result, the first identification is displayed. Variable display of information is derived and displayed by a predetermined display result (see FIG. 9-68(B)). Further, when the special display result is derived and displayed in the variable display of the first identification information while the variable display of the second identification information is being performed corresponding to the second specific display result, the second identification information is displayed. The variable display of No. is not controlled to be derived and displayed with a predetermined display result (see FIG. 9-68(E)). Therefore, in addition to the degree of advantage of the display result of the variable display, it is possible to realize the control in consideration of the variable display of the first identification information or the variable display of the second identification information.

In addition, according to the feature unit 076IW, a specific state (for example, a high probability state (probability change) that is a state different from the advantageous state and is easily controlled to be in the advantageous state as compared with a non-specific state (for example, a low probability state). State)). Further, the variable display execution means is a variable display of the identification information of one of the first identification information and the second identification information and is a variable display corresponding to the second specific display result when being controlled to the specific state. During execution of the above, based on the fact that the special display result is derived and displayed in the variable display of the other identification information, the variable display of the one identification information is derived and displayed with the predetermined display result (FIGS. 9-69, 9-). 70). In addition, when the variable display of the identification information of one of the first identification information and the second identification information, which is the variable display corresponding to the second specific display result, is being performed when the non-specific state is controlled, When the special display result is derived and displayed in the variable display of the other identification information, control for deriving and displaying the variable display of the one identification information with the predetermined display result is not performed (see FIGS. 9-69 and 9-70). ). Therefore, in addition to the advantage degree of the display result of the variable display, it is possible to realize the control in consideration of whether or not the display state is controlled to the specific state.

Further, according to the characteristic unit 076IW, the first hold storage means (for example, the first hold storage buffer) capable of storing the information regarding the variable display of the first identification information as the hold storage, and the variable display of the second identification information. And a second reserved storage unit (for example, a second reserved storage buffer) capable of storing information regarding the reserved storage. In addition, when a specific display result (for example, a jackpot pattern) is derived and displayed as a display result of the variable display of the first identification information or a display result of the variable display of the second identification information, it enters an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state). It is controllable, and when a special display result (for example, a small hitting pattern) is derived and displayed as a display result of the variable display of the first identification information or a display result of the variable display of the second identification information (for example, It can be controlled to a small hit game state). Further, it is possible to control to a special state (for example, KT state) in which the frequency of the variable display of the second identification information becoming the special display result is increased. Further, based on the fact that when the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display of the second identification information are executed in parallel, the special display result is derived and displayed as the display result of one variable display, As a display result of the other variable display, a predetermined display result (for example, a deviating pattern) different from the specific display result and the special display result is derived and displayed. Therefore, the variable display can be forcibly ended, and the pending storage can be smoothly consumed.

In addition, according to this feature part 076IW, it is possible to give a predetermined value when controlled in a special state (for example, pay out 10 prize balls based on winning of a game ball to a special winning opening), It is possible to give a value higher than a predetermined value when controlled in an advantageous state (for example, paying out 15 prize balls based on the winning of a game ball to the special winning opening). Further, as the specific notification, a first specific notification (for example, lighting of the right-handed indicator 26 and the right-handed notification LED 37 shown in (1) and (2) of FIG. 9-51) and the first specific notification are visually recognized. It is possible to execute the second specific notification (for example, the right-handed display 076IW007 shown in FIG. 9-51(1)) having a high possibility. Further, when controlled to the advantageous state, the first specific notification and the second specific notification are executed (see FIG. 9-51(1)), and after the variable display of the second identification information is executed, the special state is controlled. If so, the first specific notification is executed and the second specific notification is not executed (see FIG. 9-51(2)). Therefore, it is possible to realize the notification corresponding to the value that can be given.

Further, according to the characteristic part 076IW, it is possible to execute a variable display effect (for example, a variable display of a decorative pattern) corresponding to at least the variable display of the first identification information. In addition, it is possible to execute a variable display effect in a common mode when it is controlled to a special state and when it is not controlled to a special state (for example, when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed and a small hit occurs. , Forcibly display non-reach outliers). Therefore, it is possible to reduce the recognizability to the player of being controlled to the special state after the variable display of the first identification information is executed. In addition, the reserved storage stored in the second reserved storage means can be smoothly consumed.

Further, according to the characteristic part 076IW, a delay unit (for example, a restriction piece provided on the variable winning ball device 6B) for delaying the movement of the game medium is provided on the upstream side of the variable unit on the specific path. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the target from being aimed at the timing at which the control to the special state is performed after the variable display of the second identification information is normally performed. Therefore, it is possible to strengthen the countermeasures against the game machine.

The delay means is not limited to the mode shown in this example. For example, on the upstream side of the variable winning ball device 6B or the special variable winning ball device 17 provided on the right side of the game area, as a delay means, a passage member for moving the game ball to meander left and right is provided. You may.

In addition, according to the characteristic part 076IW, a game control means (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, CPU 103)) for controlling the progress of the game, and an effect based on the information from the game control means. The production control means (for example, CPU120 for production control) which controls is provided. Further, the game control means controls the execution of the notification by the notification means (for example, the right-handed indicator 26) for performing a predetermined notification. In addition, the production control means executes a specific notification (for example, turning on the right-handed notification LED 37) in response to the notification by the notification means. Therefore, it is possible to realize appropriate notification while reducing the processing load of the effect control means.

In this example, regardless of whether the variable display of the first special symbol is executed or the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, right-handed notification is executed during the big hit game. Although the case is shown, it is not limited to such an aspect. For example, a special variable winning ball device (left big winning opening) is provided on the left side of the game area, and a special variable winning ball device (right big winning opening) is also provided on the right side of the playing area. If the variable display of the symbol is a big hit, the left big winning opening is opened during the big hit game, and if the big hit is a variable display of the second special symbol, the right big winning opening is opened during the big hit game. When applied to the gaming machine configured as described above, when the big hit in the variable display of the second special symbol, while the right hitting notification is executed during the big hit game, in the variable display of the first special symbol In the case of a big hit, the right hit notification may not be executed during the big hit game. Further, in the case of such a configuration, if the big hit in the variable display of the first special symbol, it may be configured to execute the left hitting notification during the big hit game. That is, the specific notification execution means may be configured to execute the specific notification when the variable means (in this example, the right special winning opening) is controlled to be in an advantageous state of a type in which the variable is controlled. With such a configuration, when a big hit occurs in the variable display of the first special symbol, the left hitting notification is executed during the big hitting game to prevent the player from mistakenly performing the right hitting operation. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the disadvantage of the player.

Further, in the present example, the variable winning ball device 6B (second starting winning port) is provided on the right side of the game area, so the case of executing the right hitting notification even during the KT state has been described. It is not limited to various forms. For example, when the second start winning port is applied to the gaming machine provided on the left side of the game area, the right-handed notification is not executed during the KT state, the high base state, or the time saving state. Good.

Further, in this example, only during the big hit game, in addition to turning on the right hit indicator 26 and the right hit notification LED 37, the right hit notification is executed by displaying the right hit display 076IW007 on the display screen of the image display device 5. However, the present invention is not limited to such an embodiment. For example, even in the second KT state (during small hit RUSH), in order to execute the first variable display after the end of the big hit game, in addition to turning on the right hit indicator 26 and the right hit notification LED 37 The right-handed notification may be executed by displaying the right-handed display 076IW007 on the display screen of the image display device 5. Or, in this case, for example, in the ending period at the end of the big hit game, in addition to turning on the right-handed indicator 26 and the right-handling notification LED 37, the right-handed display 076IW007 is displayed on the display screen of the image display device 5. Alternatively, the right-handed notification may be executed.

Further, in this example, the right-handed display displayed on the display screen of the image display device 5 is not limited to the mode shown in this example. For example, in addition to the right-handed display 076IW007 having a relatively large size as shown in FIG. 9-51(1), a symbol display (for example, right-facing triangle display) indicating right-handed display is displayed on the image display device 5. Thus, the right-handed notification may be executed.

Further, the method of small hit control is not limited to the mode shown in this example. For example, a plurality of special variable winning ball device is provided, and the special variable winning ball device (special winning opening) to be opened is configured to be different depending on the type of small hit, and the small display is a small hit in the variable display of the first special symbol. It may be configured such that the selection ratio of the small hit type is different depending on whether the small hit occurs in the variable display of the second special symbol. In this case, when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed, it is easy to select the small hit type (or the small hit type of the open mode with a low winning rate) opened by the special variable winning ball device with the small number of prize balls. When executing the variable display of the second special symbol, it is easy to select the small hit type (or the small hit type of the open mode with a high winning rate) that the special variable winning ball device with a large number of prize balls opens. You may comprise.

Further, in this example, when a small hit occurs in the variable display of the second special symbol, the right hit notification is given during the small hit game (see FIG. 9-51(2)), and the variable display of the first special symbol is displayed. In the case where a small hit occurs in, the right hit notification is not performed during the small hit game (see FIG. 9-51(3)), but when the small hit occurs in the variable display of the second special symbol Alternatively, the right-handed notification may not be performed in some cases. For example, when a small hit occurs when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed in a situation where the left hit operation should be performed in the normal state, the right hit notification is not performed during the small hit game. You may.

In addition, according to the feature section 076IW, when a specific display result (for example, a jackpot pattern) is derived and displayed as a display result of the variable display, it is possible to control to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) advantageous to the player. Is. Also, when a special display result (for example, a small hit symbol) different from the specific display result is displayed as a variable display result, it is possible to control to a special state different from the advantageous state (for example, a small hit game state). Is. Further, the display result of the variable display is determined by using the determination value for determining the display result of the variable display (for example, the determination value for the big hit determination, the determination value for the small hit determination). Further, it is possible to control to a non-specific state (for example, a non-probable variation state) and a specific state (for example, a probable variation state) that is easier to control to an advantageous state than the non-specific state. The judgment value includes a specific judgment value (for example, a judgment value for jackpot judgment) for deciding to display the specific display result as the display result of the variable display, and a special display result as the display result of the variable display. And a special determination value (for example, a determination value for a small hit determination) for determining to derive and display. Further, it can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values having different numbers of specific determination values (for example, setting values “1” to “6”). Further, the number of special determination values is common regardless of the set value, and is common when controlled to the non-specific state and controlled to the specific state (FIGS. 9-1 and 9). -2). Therefore, it is possible to realize appropriate game playability.

Specifically, if the lottery probability other than the jackpot winning probability and the type distribution change depending on the setting value, the difference in the degree of advantage (difference in payout performance) becomes too remarkable depending on the setting value, and the gambling probability may become excessively high. There is. Therefore, in this feature unit 076IW, the number of special determination values is set to be common regardless of the set value (the small hit winning probability is set to be common), so that the difference in the advantage degree is prevented from becoming excessively large depending on the set value. However, it prevents gambling from becoming excessively high.

Further, according to the feature section 076IW, the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display of the second identification information can be executed in parallel (for example, the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol). And can be executed in parallel). Further, it is possible to control to a special state (for example, KT state) in which the frequency of the variable display of the second identification information becomes a special display result (for example, a small hit symbol). Therefore, in the gaming machine that can be controlled in the special state, it is possible to realize appropriate game playability.

In addition, according to the characteristic part 076IW, the special state is divided into the first special state (for example, the first KT state) and the second special state (for example, the second KT state) having a higher advantage than the first special state. It is controllable. Therefore, in the gaming machine that can be controlled in the second special state, it is possible to realize appropriate game playability.

Further, according to the feature part 076IW, it is possible to execute the special suggestion effect corresponding to the advantage of the special state (for example, the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect shown in FIG. 9-50). Therefore, by suggesting the degree of advantage of the special state, the interest in the game can be improved.

Further, according to the characteristic part 076IW, a predetermined display result (for example, deviating pattern) different from the specific display result (for example, big hit symbol) and the special display result (for example, small hit symbol) is derived as the display result of the variable display. When the displayed variable display is executed, it is possible to execute the setting value suggesting effect that suggests the setting value (for example, the setting value suggesting effect shown in FIG. 9-49). Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest in the game by executing the set value suggestion effect.

In this example, the case where the small hit RUSH continuation suggesting effect and the set value suggesting effect are executed in the variable display which is out of sync is shown, but the present invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect and the set value suggestion effect may be executed during the big hit game or the small hit game, and various modes are possible.

Further, according to the characteristic part 076IW, it is possible to control to a plurality of types of advantageous states (for example, 10R certainty change big hit, 6R certainty change big hit, 6R normal big hit, 2R certainty change big hit, 2R normal big hit). Further, the type of the advantageous state is determined using the advantageous type determination value (for example, the jackpot type determination value) for determining the type of the advantageous state. The number of advantageous type determination values is common regardless of the set value (see Fig. 9-3). Therefore, more appropriate game play can be realized.

Specifically, in the feature unit 076IW, the number of advantageous type determination values is common regardless of the set value (the big hit type is shared in common), so that the difference in the advantageous degree is excessively large depending on the set value. It prevents the gambling from becoming excessively high.

Note that, in this example, as shown in FIG. 9C, the case where the jackpot type allocation is the same regardless of which of the setting values “1” to “6” is shown. It is not limited to the mode. For example, the determination ratio of the big hit type may be changed depending on which of the set values “1” to “6”, and the advantage may be varied depending on the set value.

In addition, according to the feature section 076IW, when a specific display result (for example, a jackpot pattern) is derived and displayed as a display result of the variable display, it is possible to control to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) advantageous to the player. Is. Also, when a special display result (for example, a small hit symbol) different from the specific display result is displayed as a variable display result, it is possible to control to a special state different from the advantageous state (for example, a small hit game state). Is. Further, the display result of the variable display is determined by using the determination value for determining the display result of the variable display (for example, the determination value for the big hit determination, the determination value for the small hit determination). Further, the judgment value includes a specific judgment value (for example, a judgment value for jackpot judgment) for deciding to derive and display the specific display result as the display result of the variable display, and a special display result as the display result of the variable display. It is determined that the special judgment value (for example, the judgment value for the small hit judgment) for deciding to derive and display the predetermined display result different from the specific display result and the special display result as the display result of the variable display. And a predetermined determination value (for example, a determination value for determination of deviation) are included. Further, it can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values having different numbers of specific determination values (for example, setting values “1” to “6”). Further, the number of special determination values is common regardless of the set value (see FIGS. 9-1 and 9-2). Further, the predetermined determination value is included in the determination values corresponding to all the set values, and the number of the predetermined determination values differs depending on the set value (see FIGS. 9-1 and 9-2). Therefore, it is possible to increase the difficulty of guessing the set value and improve the interest in the game.

Further, according to the characteristic unit 076IW, it is possible to control to a non-specific state (for example, a non-probable variation state) and a specific state (for example, a probable variation state) that is easier to control than the non-specific state. Further, the predetermined determination value is included in the determination values corresponding to the specific states of all the set values (see FIGS. 9-1 and 9-2). Therefore, it is possible to increase the difficulty of estimating the set value during the specific state.

Further, according to the feature section 076IW, the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display of the second identification information can be executed in parallel (for example, the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol). Variable display can be executed in parallel). Further, the number of special determination values corresponding to the variable display of the second identification information is larger than the number of special determination values corresponding to the variable display of the first identification information, and the variable display of the second identification information in the specific state is performed. The corresponding judgment value includes a predetermined judgment value (see FIGS. 9-1 and 9-2). Therefore, it is possible to increase the difficulty of estimating the set value using the display result of the variable display of the second identification information in the specific state.

Further, according to the characteristic part 076IW, it is possible to control to a special state (for example, the KT state) in which the display result of the variable display of the second identification information is increased to the special display result. In addition, when a variable display is performed that is controlled to a special state and a predetermined display result (for example, a deviating pattern) is derived and displayed, a setting value suggesting effect that suggests a setting value (for example, the setting shown in FIG. Value suggestion production) can be executed. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest in the game by executing the set value suggestion effect.

Further, according to the feature section 076IW, it is possible to perform variable display of the first identification information (for example, the first special symbol) and variable display of the second identification information (for example, the second special symbol). Further, when a specific display result (for example, a big hit symbol) is derived and displayed as the display result of the variable display, it is possible to control to an advantageous state advantageous for the player (for example, a big hit gaming state). Also, when a special display result (for example, a small hit symbol) different from the specific display result is displayed as a variable display result, it is possible to control to a special state different from the advantageous state (for example, a small hit game state). Is. Further, the display result of the variable display is determined by using the determination value for determining the display result of the variable display (for example, the determination value for the big hit determination, the determination value for the small hit determination). The judgment value includes a specific judgment value (for example, a judgment value for jackpot judgment) for deciding to display the specific display result as the display result of the variable display, and a special display result as the display result of the variable display. And a special determination value (for example, a determination value for a small hit determination) for determining to derive and display. Further, it can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values having different numbers of specific determination values (for example, setting values “1” to “6”). The number of special determination values among the determination values corresponding to the variable display of the second identification information is common regardless of the set value (see FIG. 9-2), and the determination corresponding to the variable display of the first identification information is performed. The number of special determination values differs between the value and the determination value corresponding to the variable display of the second identification information (see FIGS. 9-1 and 9-2). Therefore, it is possible to eliminate the monotonousness of the game while realizing the appropriate game playability.

1 ... Pachinko game machine 2 ... Game board 3 ... Game machine frame 4A, 4B ... Special pattern display device 5 ... Image display device 6A ... Winning ball device 6B ... Variable winning ball device 7 ... Special variable winning ball device 8L, 8R ... Speaker 9... Frame LED
10 General prize hole 11 Main board 12 Production control board 13 Voice control board 14 LED control board 15 Relay board 17 Special variable winning ball device 20 Normal pattern display 21 Gate switch 22A, 22B Start Mouth switch 23... 1st count switch 24... 2nd count switch 30... Hitting ball operation handle 31A... Stick controller 31B... Push button 32... Movable body 41... Passage gate 100... Game control microcomputers 101, 121... ROM
102, 122... RAM
103... CPU
104, 124... Random number circuit 105, 125... I/O
120... CPU for production control
123... Display control unit

Claims (1)

A gaming machine that variably displays and can be controlled in an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player,
Holding storage means capable of storing information regarding variable display as holding storage;
Special state control means capable of controlling to a special state different from the advantageous state,
Special state control means capable of controlling to a special state that is controlled to have a higher frequency than the non-special state,
In the special state, a pre-suggestion effect execution means capable of executing a pre-suggestion effect indicating in advance that there is a pending storage corresponding to being controlled to the special state,
On the basis of the execution of the pre-indication production, a number suggestion production execution means capable of executing the number suggestion production suggesting the number of times the special state is controlled,
A specific display means capable of displaying a specific display corresponding to the number of times the special state is suggested in the number suggesting effect;
The specific display means, when controlled to the special state, changes the specific display in response to being controlled to the special state,
The number-of-times suggestion production execution means,
As the execution pattern of the number suggestion production, at least a first pattern suggesting that the special state is controlled a first number of times and a second pattern that is more than the first number of times is suggested to the special state are suggested. With the second pattern to
When the number of times the special state suggested by the specific display is controlled is small, the number suggestion effect can be executed at a higher rate than when the number of times the special state suggested by the specific display is controlled is large. A gaming machine characterized by being.

Images